ML20206U738: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
StriderTol Bot insert
 
StriderTol Bot change
 
Line 17: Line 17:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:., _ ...              .__                      -        .    -              _.              .        ,          __    . . _ .
{{#Wiki_filter:,
.)
.)
Enclosure (1)
Enclosure (1)
U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION REGION V EXAMINATION REPORT Examination Report No.: 50-397/0L-86-02 i                         Facility:                               Washington Nuclear Project, WNP-2 Docket No.:                             50-397 4
U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION REGION V EXAMINATION REPORT Examination Report No.: 50-397/0L-86-02 i
Facility License No.:                   NPF-21
Facility:
;                        Examinations administered at Washington Nuclear Project, WNP-2, Richland, Washington Chief Examiner:               .CFM # N                             ~
Washington Nuclear Project, WNP-2 Docket No.:
                                                                                                          >-er-Et-Thomas R. Meadows                             Date Signed Approved by:                _.
50-397 Facility License No.:
                                                                                                    '7       7[gG n O. Elin, Chief, Operations Section     D6te Signed Summary:
NPF-21 4
Examinations administered at Washington Nuclear Project, WNP-2, Richland, Washington Chief Examiner:
.CFM # N
>-er-Et-
~
Thomas R. Meadows Date Signed
'7 7[gG Approved by:
n O. Elin, Chief, Operations Section D6te Signed Summary:
Examinations on August 11-14, 1986.
Examinations on August 11-14, 1986.
4 Written ~and oral examinations were administered to five SRO candidates and i                         five RO candidates. One SRO candidate failed the simulator- portion of the-exam, and one SRO candidate failed both the oral and simulator portions of j                         the ex~am. All of the remaining candidates passed.
4 Written ~and oral examinations were administered to five SRO candidates and i
five RO candidates. One SRO candidate failed the simulator-portion of the-exam, and one SRO candidate failed both the oral and simulator portions of j
the ex~am.
All of the remaining candidates passed.
1 4
1 4
2 l
2 l
4 i
4 i
1 8610080250 860919 PDR         ADOCK 05000397 V                             PDR
1 8610080250 860919 PDR ADOCK 05000397 V
                                                                        .    -_ . - -            ,~ .__ -      .        . - _ _ .        -
PDR
,~


REPORT DETAILS
REPORT DETAILS 1.
: 1. Examiners:
Examiners:
* Thomas Meadows, RV John Hanek, INEL Merton Bishop, INEL
* Thomas Meadows, RV John Hanek, INEL Merton Bishop, INEL
* Chief Examiner
* Chief Examiner 2.
: 2. Persons Attending the Exit Meeting:
Persons Attending the Exit Meeting:
T. Meadows, RV, Chief Examiner J. Baker, WNP-2, Assistant Plant Manager R. Corcoran, WNP-2, Plant Operations Manager J. Wyrick, WNP-2, License Training Manager M. Westergren, WNP-2, License Training Supervisor
T. Meadows, RV, Chief Examiner J. Baker, WNP-2, Assistant Plant Manager R. Corcoran, WNP-2, Plant Operations Manager J. Wyrick, WNP-2, License Training Manager M. Westergren, WNP-2, License Training Supervisor 3.
: 3. Written Examination and Facility Review:
Written Examination and Facility Review:
Written examinations were administered to five SRO candidates and five RO candidates on August 11, 1986 in the facilities training building.
Written examinations were administered to five SRO candidates and five RO candidates on August 11, 1986 in the facilities training building.
The facility staff reviewed the exams immediately upon their conclusion.
The facility staff reviewed the exams immediately upon their conclusion.
The comments made by the staff are attached. All comments were resolved.
The comments made by the staff are attached. All comments were resolved.
Appropriate changes were made to the pplicable SRO and R0 exam keys prior to the grading of the exams.
Appropriate changes were made to the pplicable SRO and R0 exam keys prior to the grading of the exams.
: 4. Operating Examinations:
4.
Operating Examinations:
No general training weaknesses were noted during oral examinations conducted August 12-14, 1986.
No general training weaknesses were noted during oral examinations conducted August 12-14, 1986.
The plant specific simulator was found adequate to conduct comprehensive NRC exams. However, the simulators performance was marginal, requiring excessive time to complete exam scenarios. The Chief Examiner met with the facility training staff to develop specific objectives that will achieve more efficient simulator examinations. The facility staff committed to meet the intent of these objectives within the next 2 or 3 exam cycl.es.
The plant specific simulator was found adequate to conduct comprehensive NRC exams. However, the simulators performance was marginal, requiring excessive time to complete exam scenarios. The Chief Examiner met with the facility training staff to develop specific objectives that will achieve more efficient simulator examinations. The facility staff committed to meet the intent of these objectives within the next 2 or 3 exam cycl.es.
I
I 5.
: 5. Exit Meeting:
Exit Meeting:
On August 14, 1986, the Chief Examiner met with the licensee representatives   I listed in paragraph 2. The marginal simulator performance, and appropriate improvement action noted in paragraph 4 was discussed.
On August 14, 1986, the Chief Examiner met with the licensee representatives listed in paragraph 2.
The marginal simulator performance, and appropriate improvement action noted in paragraph 4 was discussed.
l 1
l 1


  .~ -                          .
.~
i ATTACHMENT 1 WNP-2 SRO-EXAM (AUGUST 11, 1986)
i ATTACHMENT 1 WNP-2 SRO-EXAM (AUGUST 11, 1986)
FACILITY COMMENTS /NRC RESOLUTIONS NOTE:   Facility comments were submitted on a copy of an exam key provided for this use. This key is attached.
FACILITY COMMENTS /NRC RESOLUTIONS NOTE:
5.10     Comment:     Question is confusing in that the candidates are trained that MAPRAT is only a computer name for the thermal limit APLHGR.
Facility comments were submitted on a copy of an exam key provided for this use.
Resolution: Comment not accepted. The candidate must know the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR in order to properly interpret the computer print out. The answer key is in agreement with the reference provided and will stand as is.
This key is attached.
5.10 Comment:
Question is confusing in that the candidates are trained that MAPRAT is only a computer name for the thermal limit APLHGR.
Resolution: Comment not accepted. The candidate must know the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR in order to properly interpret the computer print out.
The answer key is in agreement with the reference provided and will stand as is.


===6.5 Comment===
===6.5 Comment===
This question is misleading - it implies that this is the preferred ECCS injection flow path. The question should have asked:
This question is misleading - it implies that this is the preferred ECCS injection flow path. The question should have asked:
                              "What are two (2) conditions when this flow path is preferred?" The candidates will be confused about which-set of RHR valves your talking about:
"What are two (2) conditions when this flow path is preferred?" The candidates will be confused about which-set of RHR valves your talking about:
RHR-V-42A. and B; LPCI injection j                                               or RHR-V 53A and BTRHR S/D cooling Resolution: Comment accepted; however, this question was accurates based on training material provided. Since the facility training staff has committed to upgrade their training material to accurately reflect actual system logic, the exam key will be modified to accept other possible answers concerning direct core ECCS injection for full credit.
RHR-V-42A. and B; LPCI injection j
6.10   Comment:     The answer key should be clarified such that any one of the following conditions would be. acceptable for full credit of the applicable portion of the answer:
or RHR-V 53A and BTRHR S/D cooling Resolution: Comment accepted; however, this question was accurates based on training material provided. Since the facility training staff has committed to upgrade their training material to accurately reflect actual system logic, the exam key will be modified to accept other possible answers concerning direct core ECCS injection for full credit.
(a) Initial core loading (b) SDM testing                                                               *
6.10 Comment:
(c) Various testing during refueling Resolution: Comment accepted. This was the intent of the answer key. Subsequently, the answer key will be modified to emphasize this point.
The answer key should be clarified such that any one of the following conditions would be. acceptable for full credit of the applicable portion of the answer:
(a) Initial core loading (b) SDM testing (c) Various testing during refueling Resolution: Comment accepted. This was the intent of the answer key. Subsequently, the answer key will be modified to emphasize this point.


o
o 6.11 Comment:
* 6.11 Comment:     Question is slightly confusing in that some of these curves do not have a " reason or basis", but merely identify a given power / flow condition.
Question is slightly confusing in that some of these curves do not have a " reason or basis", but merely identify a given power / flow condition.
Resolution: Comment not accepted. The term " reason" adequately                 ,
Resolution: Comment not accepted. The term " reason" adequately covers this contingency, and this question is consistent with the training material provided.
covers this contingency, and this question is consistent with the training material provided.
7.6
7.6 ' Comment:     The answer should indicate that " negative design containment pressure" is the bottom line answer.        .
' Comment:
The answer should indicate that " negative design containment pressure" is the bottom line answer.
Resolution: Comment not accepted. This is the intent of the answer key, and is worth the majority of the available points; however, the candidate should mention somethla.; about containment vacuum breakers rince this is the reason
Resolution: Comment not accepted. This is the intent of the answer key, and is worth the majority of the available points; however, the candidate should mention somethla.; about containment vacuum breakers rince this is the reason
* hat they were installed.
* hat they were installed.


===7.7 Comnent===
===7.7 Comnent===
Since " adequate core cooling" cannot be directly           ,
Since " adequate core cooling" cannot be directly measured by the operator (cladding temperature 2200 degrees F.), he must " infer" adequate core cooling by the following methods:
measured by the operator (cladding temperature 2200 degrees F.), he must " infer" adequate core cooling by the following methods:
(a) RPV level TAF (b) One ECCS injecting at full flow rate (c) Steam cooling of RPV in progress This is consistent with the reference material provided.
(a) RPV level TAF (b) One ECCS injecting at full flow rate (c) Steam cooling of RPV in progress This is consistent with the reference material provided.
Resolution: Comment accepted. The answer key will be modified to include this other acceptable answer.
Resolution: Comment accepted. The answer key will be modified to include this other acceptable answer.
Line 82: Line 100:
===8.1 Comment===
===8.1 Comment===
Answer key should specify the bottom line answer - one required for full credit.
Answer key should specify the bottom line answer - one required for full credit.
Resolution: Comment accepted. Answer key will be clarified.
Resolution:
Comment accepted. Answer key will be clarified.


===8.4 Comment===
===8.4 Comment===
Parcs (f) and (g) of the answer key is not part of technical specifications shift manning table, therefore, should not be required for full credit.
Parcs (f) and (g) of the answer key is not part of technical specifications shift manning table, therefore, should not be required for full credit.
Resolution: Comment not accepted. The table requirements for shift manning are only part of the answer. The question clearly stated, "per technical specifications".
Resolution:
Comment not accepted. The table requirements for shift manning are only part of the answer. The question clearly stated, "per technical specifications".


===8.5 Comment===
===8.5 Comment===
Identified areas of the key should not be required in the answer.
Identified areas of the key should not be required in the answer.
Resolution: Comment accepted. This was the intent of the key. The             i answer key will be corrected to clarify this intent.
Resolution:
l I
Comment accepted. This was the intent of the key. The i
answer key will be corrected to clarify this intent.
l
l


ATTACHMENT 2 FACILITY COMMENTS /NRC RESOLUTIONS WNP R0 EXAM GIVEN ON
ATTACHMENT 2 FACILITY COMMENTS /NRC RESOLUTIONS WNP R0 EXAM GIVEN ON
                                        ' AUGUST 11, 1986 J
' AUGUST 11, 1986 J
NOTE: Facility comments were submitted on a copy of an exam key provided for this use. This key is attached.
NOTE: Facility comments were submitted on a copy of an exam key provided for this use. This key is attached.
1.04     Comment:     The word physical may confuse candidates. Could possibly get answers pertaining to " physical" properties (FW pump, fission product buildup, core' aging effects, core flow, etc).
1.04 Comment:
The word physical may confuse candidates.
Could possibly get answers pertaining to " physical" properties (FW pump, fission product buildup, core' aging effects, core flow, etc).
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Question specifically asks for fuel characteristics with increasing fuel temperature that' contribute to a negative doppler co-efficient.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Question specifically asks for fuel characteristics with increasing fuel temperature that' contribute to a negative doppler co-efficient.
Answer key is correct in this-regard.
Answer key is correct in this-regard.
1.11     Comment:     Question is confusing, MAPRAT is only a computer name for the thermal limits APLHGR. Also MAPRAT is always maintained 1 1.0 not > 1.0.
1.11 Comment:
: a. Could get > 1,0 depending on how the question is read.
Question is confusing, MAPRAT is only a computer name for the thermal limits APLHGR. Also MAPRAT is always maintained 1 1.0 not > 1.0.
: b. Or MAPRAT is the computer calculation used to identify where the APLHGR thermal limit may be exceeded.
a.
Could get > 1,0 depending on how the question is read.
b.
Or MAPRAT is the computer calculation used to identify where the APLHGR thermal limit may be exceeded.
Resolution: Comment accepted; Question 1.11 facility comment is valid MAPRAT is not a thermal limit, and is always maintained
Resolution: Comment accepted; Question 1.11 facility comment is valid MAPRAT is not a thermal limit, and is always maintained
                          $ 1.0.
$ 1.0.
Answer 1.11a will be changed to < 1.0.
Answer 1.11a will be changed to < 1.0.
4                        Answer 1.11b facility comment is valid. Question specifically asks for the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR, additional facility answer will be accepted.
Answer 1.11b facility comment is valid. Question 4
1.16     Comment:     Additional answers for recirculation flow, (FCW position, pump speed) reactor power (rod position) FW temp (FW heater lineup) should be included in answer key.
specifically asks for the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR, additional facility answer will be accepted.
Resolution: Comment accepted. Facility comment is valid     additional answers will be added to the answer key.
1.16 Comment:
Additional answers for recirculation flow, (FCW position, pump speed) reactor power (rod position) FW temp (FW heater lineup) should be included in answer key.
Resolution: Comment accepted.
Facility comment is valid additional answers will be added to the answer key.


2                                           1 2.02b Comment:         The following statement (flux shapes at the end of cycle are such that the) should not be required for full credit.
2 1
2.02b Comment:
The following statement (flux shapes at the end of cycle are such that the) should not be required for full credit.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This answer is verbatim from the recirculation system lesson plan. The important concept and key phrase here is " flux shapes." End of cycle was already stated in the question and is included only for sentence structure.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This answer is verbatim from the recirculation system lesson plan. The important concept and key phrase here is " flux shapes." End of cycle was already stated in the question and is included only for sentence structure.
2.02c Comment:         Technical Specification Table 3.3.4. 2-1 note (b) states this function shall be automatically bypassed when                       .
2.02c Comment:
turbine first stage pressure is less than or equal to 165 psig equivalent to thermal power less than 30% of
Technical Specification Table 3.3.4. 2-1 note (b) states this function shall be automatically bypassed when turbine first stage pressure is less than or equal to 165 psig equivalent to thermal power less than 30% of rated thermal power.
:                                            rated thermal power. (142 psig also accepted)
(142 psig also accepted)
Resolution: Comment accepted. Technical Specification Table 3.3.4.2-1 note (b) is correct for this answer. Answer key was
Resolution: Comment accepted. Technical Specification Table 3.3.4.2-1 note (b) is correct for this answer. Answer key was taken from reactor recirculation lesson plan page 31.
,                                              taken from reactor recirculation lesson plan page 31.
Also, annunciator response procedures 4.603.A7-5.4 and 4.603.A8-5.4 give setpoints of less than 30% equivalent reactor power and 1st stage pressure less than 108.5 psig.
Also, annunciator response procedures 4.603.A7-5.4 and 4.603.A8-5.4 give setpoints of less than 30% equivalent reactor power and 1st stage pressure less than 108.5 psig.
The answer key will be changed to <165 psig (or <145 psig)
The answer key will be changed to <165 psig (or <145 psig)
Ist stage pressure or <30% rated thermal power.
Ist stage pressure or <30% rated thermal power.
f 2.09   Comment:       Answer key is vague as to point breakdown / assignment.
f 2.09 Comment:
Resolution:     Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept credit for system operational function.
Answer key is vague as to point breakdown / assignment.
2.10a Comment:         Question referenced PPM 5.1.3, procedure answer was as stated in lesson plan for SLC.
Resolution:
Resolution:     Comment accepted. Answer key will be changed to "If the reactor cannot be shutdown [0.5] before suppression pool I
Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept credit for system operational function.
temperature reaches 110*F (0.5). Point values will be adjusted as indicated. PPM 5.1.3 page 2 of 9 will be 1                                             included in reference.
2.10a Comment:
2.11a Comment:         Off-gas glycol cooling system is not actually an off gas a                                             component.
Question referenced PPM 5.1.3, procedure answer was as stated in lesson plan for SLC.
i Resolution: Comment accepted. 2.11.a.13 will be deleted from the question and 2.11.a.10 from the answer key.                 Point breakdown will be changed.
Resolution:
2.llb Comment:         CAS system is also used to " warm-up" the system.
Comment accepted. Answer key will be changed to "If the reactor cannot be shutdown [0.5] before suppression pool I
Resolution: Comment accepted.                     PPM 2.6.4 step 29 page 9 of 48 states
temperature reaches 110*F (0.5).
                                              " Admit service air to the preheater selected for service by throttling open service air valve 06-V-4A(B) locally until 64 SCFM is indicated on SA-FI-67." Warmup the system will be included in the answer key.
Point values will be adjusted as indicated. PPM 5.1.3 page 2 of 9 will be 1
included in reference.
2.11a Comment:
Off-gas glycol cooling system is not actually an off gas a
component.
i Resolution: Comment accepted.
2.11.a.13 will be deleted from the question and 2.11.a.10 from the answer key.
Point breakdown will be changed.
2.llb Comment:
CAS system is also used to " warm-up" the system.
Resolution: Comment accepted.
PPM 2.6.4 step 29 page 9 of 48 states
" Admit service air to the preheater selected for service by throttling open service air valve 06-V-4A(B) locally until 64 SCFM is indicated on SA-FI-67." Warmup the system will be included in the answer key.
i e
i e
    - - , - -  - -              --      , -        - - ~ - - -  < - - - , - - - .  ---  c.     ,~--c   - - - -
- - ~ -
c.
,~--c


3                                       .
3 3.01d Comment:
3.01d Comment:     Two minute period should be nine minute period.
Two minute period should be nine minute period.
Resolution: Comment accepted. Reference, PPM 3.3.1 reactor scram indicates nine minute period is correct. Two minutes is an error in the system training manual. Answer key changed to nine minute period. PPM 3.3.1 reactor scram added to reference.
Resolution:
3.03c Comment:     How much droop is inserted is outside the scope of ES-202. Why droop inserted much more important. Exact number not necessary.
Comment accepted. Reference, PPM 3.3.1 reactor scram indicates nine minute period is correct. Two minutes is an error in the system training manual. Answer key changed to nine minute period. PPM 3.3.1 reactor scram added to reference.
Resolution: Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted.
3.03c Comment:
3.04b Comment:     Answer should also include SRM > 100 cps.
How much droop is inserted is outside the scope of ES-202. Why droop inserted much more important. Exact number not necessary.
Resolution: Comment accepted. SRM > 100 cps will be added to the answer.
Resolution:
3.05   Comment:     Fuel load dunking chambers are no longer used. Delete question and answer.
Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted.
3.04b Comment:
Answer should also include SRM > 100 cps.
Resolution:
Comment accepted.
SRM > 100 cps will be added to the answer.
3.05 Comment:
Fuel load dunking chambers are no longer used. Delete question and answer.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Technical Specification 3.9.2 allows the use of special movable detectors during I
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Technical Specification 3.9.2 allows the use of special movable detectors during I
core alterations in place of the normal SRM nuclear detectors.
core alterations in place of the normal SRM nuclear detectors.
3.07a Comment:     APRM FLOW BIAS OFF-NORMAL annunciator terminology may be confusing, actual name is APRM flow converter-INOP.
3.07a Comment:
Resolution: Facility comment noted but not accepted. Page 21 of the APRM systems training lesson plan describes this function ~
APRM FLOW BIAS OFF-NORMAL annunciator terminology may be confusing, actual name is APRM flow converter-INOP.
Resolution:
Facility comment noted but not accepted. Page 21 of the APRM systems training lesson plan describes this function ~
as the APRM FLOW BIAS OFF-NORMAL".
as the APRM FLOW BIAS OFF-NORMAL".
3.07c Comment:     Flow computer should be flow comparator.
3.07c Comment:
Resolution: Comment accepted. Typographic error. Word computer changed to comparator in question 3.07.c.
Flow computer should be flow comparator.
3.07c Comment:     Question did not specifically ask for second part of answer, therefore, it should not be required for full credit.
Resolution:
Comment accepted.
Typographic error. Word computer changed to comparator in question 3.07.c.
3.07c Comment:
Question did not specifically ask for second part of answer, therefore, it should not be required for full credit.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Question was specific in that it asked what would occur if " flow comparator A" was bypassed.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Question was specific in that it asked what would occur if " flow comparator A" was bypassed.


4 3.09b Comment:     Question did not specifically ask for second part of answer. Therefore, it should not be required for full credit.
4 3.09b Comment:
Resolution: Comment accepted. Although the answer key is verbatim from the system training lesson plan, dead end is implied to mean a no flow condition. Therefore, either answer will be accepted for full credit.
Question did not specifically ask for second part of answer. Therefore, it should not be required for full credit.
3.11   Comment:     Recirculation flow controllers are not operated in auto, thus part a.1 is not really applicable.
Resolution:
Comment accepted. Although the answer key is verbatim from the system training lesson plan, dead end is implied to mean a no flow condition.
Therefore, either answer will be accepted for full credit.
3.11 Comment:
Recirculation flow controllers are not operated in auto, thus part a.1 is not really applicable.
There was no reference supplied with this question and answer.
There was no reference supplied with this question and answer.
Resolution: Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept
Resolution: Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept alternate answer.
                                                            ~
~
alternate answer.
Reference WNP-2 System Training, Recirculation Flow Control page 31, has been added to the examination.
Reference WNP-2 System Training, Recirculation Flow Control page 31, has been added to the examination.
Also, PPM 3.12 reactor plant cold S/V . PPM 9.3.12 power plant maneuvers added to reference.
Also, PPM 3.12 reactor plant cold S/V. PPM 9.3.12 power plant maneuvers added to reference.
4.08a Comment:     Question 4.08.a is outside the scope of E-S-202.
4.08a Comment:
Question 4.08.a is outside the scope of E-S-202.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This question is consistent with the requirements of ES-202 with regards that'the candidate should be able to explalia teasotis, cautions, and limitations of normal operating procedures. This question is not a normal procedure step but is a cautionary note contained in the procedure.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This question is consistent with the requirements of ES-202 with regards that'the candidate should be able to explalia teasotis, cautions, and limitations of normal operating procedures. This question is not a normal procedure step but is a cautionary note contained in the procedure.
4.09a Comment:     Question 4.09.a is outside the scope of ES-202.
4.09a Comment:
Question 4.09.a is outside the scope of ES-202.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This question is consistent with the requirements of ES-202 with regards that candidates should be able to explain reasons, cautions and lisaitations of normal operating procedures. This question is not a normal procedure step but is contained in precaution and limitations 3.3.1.5.F of the reactor scram procedure.
Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This question is consistent with the requirements of ES-202 with regards that candidates should be able to explain reasons, cautions and lisaitations of normal operating procedures. This question is not a normal procedure step but is contained in precaution and limitations 3.3.1.5.F of the reactor scram procedure.
4.10   Comment:     Answer should be either Increase or Remain the Same because HPCS flow is small compared with FW flow at this power level. Also, HPCS flow tends to be " swept upward" due to steam velocity at core exit.
4.10 Comment:
Resolution: Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept comment.
Answer should be either Increase or Remain the Same because HPCS flow is small compared with FW flow at this power level. Also, HPCS flow tends to be " swept upward" due to steam velocity at core exit.
Resolution:
Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept comment.


M                                   ff C     EXAM     A*fP         f c/
M ff C EXAM A*fP f c/
lp,
lp,
                                                                                                    ^
[ m ezw7'S
yn                            [ m ezw7'S         ),~~.,
),~~.,
      .                            U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION                       N/#    l
^
        ..                        REACTOR OPERATOR LICENSE EXAMINATION                               l l
yn N/#
FACILITY:           WNP-2 REACTOR TYPE:       BWR-GE5 DATE ADMINISTERED: 86/08/11
U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION REACTOR OPERATOR LICENSE EXAMINATION FACILITY:
            ~ nrsinst Q y g g (* g p y '           EXAMINER:           HANEK. J.
WNP-2 REACTOR TYPE:
p/ygg-       CANDIDATE:
BWR-GE5 DATE ADMINISTERED: 86/08/11 nrsinst
~ Q y g g (* g p y '
EXAMINER:
HANEK. J.
p/ygg-CANDIDATE:
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE:
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE:
Uso separate paper for the answers. Write answers on one side only.
Uso separate paper for the answers.
Staple question sheet on top of the answer sheets.                       Points for each quastion are indicated in parentheses after the question. The passing drade requires at least 70% in each category and a final grade of at least 80%. Examination papers will be picked up six (6) hours after the examination starts.
Write answers on one side only.
                                                  % OF CATEGORY           % OF       CANDIDATE'S   CATEGORY VALUE           TOTAL         SCORE         VALUE                 CATEGORY 2 r. r'/
Staple question sheet on top of the answer sheets.
25.00             25. CCE                             1. PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION, THERMODYNAMICS, HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW zi. W 25.00             05.007-                             2. PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS z r. c +-
Points for each quastion are indicated in parentheses after the question.
25.00             25.00 -                             3. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 22efd             23.08
The passing drade requires at least 70% in each category and a final grade of at least 80%.
  - 2 5 . 0iu> - - 2 " . CP   '
Examination papers will be picked up six (6) hours after the examination starts.
: 4. PROCEDURES - NORMAL, ABNORMAL,
% OF CATEGORY
                              '^
% OF CANDIDATE'S CATEGORY VALUE TOTAL SCORE VALUE CATEGORY 2 r. r'/
EMERGENCY AND RADIOLOGICAL
25.00
                      , , , 7,                               CONTROL 9 7. ro
: 25. CCE 1.
-100. # 'r-                                                 Totals Final Grade All work done on this examination is my own.                 I have neither given nor received aid.
PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION, THERMODYNAMICS, HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW zi. W 25.00 05.007-2.
PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS z r. c +-
25.00 25.00 -
3.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 22efd 23.08
- 2 5. 0iu> - - 2 ". CP 4.
PROCEDURES - NORMAL, ABNORMAL, EMERGENCY AND RADIOLOGICAL
'^
,,, 7, CONTROL 9 7. ro
-100. # 'r-Totals Final Grade All work done on this examination is my own.
I have neither given nor received aid.
Candidate's Signature
Candidate's Signature


t 2 -       o
t 2 -
                                '                                                                                                                                            ES-201-2                                     ,
o ES-201-2 i
i         .
ATTACHMENT 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATION OF WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS 1.
ATTACHMENT 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATION OF WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS
A single room shall be provided for completing the written examina-tion. The location or tnis room e d supporting restroom facilities shall be such as to prevent contact with all other facility and/or contractor personnel during the duration of the written examination.
: 1. A single room shall be provided for completing the written examina-tion. The location or tnis room e d supporting restroom facilities shall be such as to prevent contact with all other facility and/or contractor personnel during the duration of the written examination.
If necessary, the facility should make arrangements for the use of Ob-a suitable room at a local school, motel, or other building.
If necessary, the facility should make arrangements for the use of a suitable room at a local school, motel, or other building. Ob-taining this room is the responsibility of the licensee.
taining this room is the responsibility of the licensee.
: 2. Minimum spacing is required to ensure examination integrity as determined by the chief examiner. Minimum spacing should be one
2.
,                                        candidate per table, with a 3-ft space between tables. No wall charts, models, and/or other training materials shall be present in the examination room.
Minimum spacing is required to ensure examination integrity as determined by the chief examiner. Minimum spacing should be one candidate per table, with a 3-ft space between tables.
: 3. Suitable arrangements shall be made by the facility if the candi-dates are to have lunch, coffee, or other refreshments. These arrangements shall comply with Item 1 above. These arrangements shall be reviewed by the examiner and/or proctor.
No wall charts, models, and/or other training materials shall be present in the examination room.
i                                 4. The facility staff shall be provided a copy of the written examination and answer key after the last candidate has completed and handed in
3.
,                                        his written examination. The facility staff shall then have five working i                                        days to provide formal written comments with supporting documentation on j
Suitable arrangements shall be made by the facility if the candi-dates are to have lunch, coffee, or other refreshments.
the examination and answer key to the chief examiner or to the regional 3
These arrangements shall comply with Item 1 above. These arrangements shall be reviewed by the examiner and/or proctor.
i 4.
The facility staff shall be provided a copy of the written examination and answer key after the last candidate has completed and handed in his written examination.
The facility staff shall then have five working days to provide formal written comments with supporting documentation on i
the examination and answer key to the chief examiner or to the regional j
office section chief.
office section chief.
: 5. The licensee shall provide pads of 8-1/2 by 11 in. lined paper in unopened packages for each candidate's use in completing the exam-                                                                                                                 ,
3 5.
ination. The examiner shall distribute these pads to the candidates.                                                                                                             )
The licensee shall provide pads of 8-1/2 by 11 in. lined paper in unopened packages for each candidate's use in completing the exam-ination. The examiner shall distribute these pads to the candidates.
All reference material needed to complete the examination shall be                                                                                                                 l furnished by the examiner. Candidates can bring pens, pencils, calculators, or slide rules into the examination room, and no other 4                                          equipment or reference material shall be allowed.
)
: 6. Only black ink or dark pencils should be used for writing answers                                                                                                   '
All reference material needed to complete the examination shall be l
to questions.
furnished by the examiner.
l Examiner Standards                                                                                 11 of 18
Candidates can bring pens, pencils, calculators, or slide rules into the examination room, and no other equipment or reference material shall be allowed.
: s.     D NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS
4 6.
        .Dur*ng the administration of this examination the following rules apply:
Only black ink or dark pencils should be used for writing answers to questions.
: 1. Cheating on the examination means an automatic denial of your application and could result in more severe penalties.
l Examiner Standards 11 of 18
: 2. Restroom trips are to be limited and only one candidate at a time may leave. You must avoid all contacts with anyone outside the examination 4
 
room to avoid even the appearance or possibility of cheating.
s.
: 3. Use black ink or dark pencil onlY to facilitate legible reproductions.
D NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS
: 4. Print your name in the blank provided on the cover sheet of the examination.
.Dur*ng the administration of this examination the following rules apply:
: 5. Fill in the date on the cover sheet of the examination (if necessary).
1.
4
Cheating on the examination means an automatic denial of your application and could result in more severe penalties.
: 6. Use only the paper provided for answers.
2.
i       7. Print your name in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section of the answe r sheet.
Restroom trips are to be limited and only one candidate at a time may leave.
: 8. Consecutively number each answer sheet, write "End of Category __" as appropriate, start each category on a naw Page, write onlY gg QB1 side of the paper, and write "Last Page" on the last answer sheet.
You must avoid all contacts with anyone outside the examination room to avoid even the appearance or possibility of cheating.
: 9. Number each answer as to category and number, for example, 1.4, 6.3.
4 3.
Use black ink or dark pencil onlY to facilitate legible reproductions.
4.
Print your name in the blank provided on the cover sheet of the examination.
5.
Fill in the date on the cover sheet of the examination (if necessary).
4 6.
Use only the paper provided for answers.
i 7.
Print your name in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section of the answe r sheet.
8.
Consecutively number each answer sheet, write "End of Category __" as appropriate, start each category on a naw Page, write onlY gg QB1 side of the paper, and write "Last Page" on the last answer sheet.
9.
Number each answer as to category and number, for example, 1.4, 6.3.
: 10. Skip at least three lines between each answer.
: 10. Skip at least three lines between each answer.
1
1
{         11. Separate answer sheets from pad and place finished answer sheets face down on your desk or table.
{
: 11. Separate answer sheets from pad and place finished answer sheets face down on your desk or table.
: 12. Use abbreviations only if they are commonly used in facility literature.
: 12. Use abbreviations only if they are commonly used in facility literature.
: 13. The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question and can be used as a guide for the depth of answer required.
: 13. The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question and can be used as a guide for the depth of answer required.
j         14. Show all calculations, methods, or assumptions used to obtain an answer to mathematical problems whether indicated in the question or not.
j
: 15. Partial credit may be given. Therefore, ANSWER ALL PARTS OF THE QUESTION AND DO NOT LEAVE ANY ANSWER BLANK.
: 14. Show all calculations, methods, or assumptions used to obtain an answer to mathematical problems whether indicated in the question or not.
i         16. If parts of the examination are not clear as to intent, ask questions of                                     j the examiner only.
: 15. Partial credit may be given.
: 17. You must sign the statement on the cover sheet that indicates that the
Therefore, ANSWER ALL PARTS OF THE QUESTION AND DO NOT LEAVE ANY ANSWER BLANK.
;                work is your own and you have not received or been given assistance in j               completing the examination. This must be done after the examination has
i
:                been completed.
: 16. If parts of the examination are not clear as to intent, ask questions of j
the examiner only.
: 17. You must sign the statement on the cover sheet that indicates that the work is your own and you have not received or been given assistance in j
completing the examination.
This must be done after the examination has been completed.
i i
i i
)
)
: 18. When you complete your examination, you shall:
: 18. When you complete your examination, you shall:
: a.                     Assemble your examination as follows:
a.
(1) Exam questions on top.
Assemble your examination as follows:
(2) Exam aids - figures, tables, etc.                                                     ,
(1)
(3) Answer pages including figures which are part of the answer.
Exam questions on top.
: b.                     Turn in your copy of the examination and all pages used to answer the examination questions.
(2)
: c.                    Turn in all scrap paper and the balance of the paper that you did not use for answering the questions.
Exam aids - figures, tables, etc.
: d.                     Leave the examination area, as defined by the examiner.     If after leaving, you are found in this area while the examination is still in progress, your license may be denied or revoked.
(3)
Answer pages including figures which are part of the answer.
b.
Turn in your copy of the examination and all pages used to answer the examination questions.
Turn in all scrap paper and the balance of the paper that you did c.
not use for answering the questions.
d.
Leave the examination area, as defined by the examiner.
If after leaving, you are found in this area while the examination is still in progress, your license may be denied or revoked.
l l
l l
            . . , - , . - , - . -        -.,<v ,,y. -    - ,-        . - ,            - . -  ---  - - - - - -------.w-,--
-.,<v
,,y.
-------.w-,--


EQUATION SHEET f = ne v = s/t 2                                           **
EQUATION SHEET f = ne v = s/t 2
w = ag                       s = v,t + at           Cycle efficiency =                        * ' "' I '        -
Cycle efficiency =
Energy (in)
* ' "' I '
E = aC     -
w = ag s = v,t +
a = (vg - v,)/t KE = 1prv                  vg                    A = AN                 A = A,e
at Energy (in)
                                                  = v, + a t PE = agh                   w = e/t               A = In 2/tg = 0.693/tg       ,
E = aC a = (vg - v,)/t KE = 1 rv A = AN g = v, + a t A = A,e p
4 W = VAP g(eff) = (t,,)(ts) t AE = 931Am           ,
v PE = agh w = e/t A = In 2/tg = 0.693/tg W = VAP 4
(   +       )
g(eff) = (t,,)(ts) t AE = 931Am
Q=[ncAT                                           I = I
(
                                                                                    ~
+
IX
)
                    ,      P                                     ,
Q=[ncAT I = I IX
o
~
              ',  Q = UAAT                                           I = I . UX
P o
                                                                                    ~
Q = UAAT I = I. UX
                                ~
~
Pwr = Wg m         ,                              I=I          lo -X/ M y=p to      SUR(t),                               IyL = 1.3/u y=p .t/T                                           HVI. ' O.693/u o
Pwr = W m
                  ~SUR = 26.06/T                                                                                           ~
-X/ M
T = 1.44 DT SCR = S/(1 - K,gg) fa geo \
~
SUR = 26                                           CR 6-p                                      x = S/(1 - K,gg )
g I=I lo SUR(t),
T = (1*/o ) + [(f _* p)/A,g,p}                           1(
IyL = 1.3/u y=p to y=p.t/T HVI. ' O.693/u o
                                                                                  ~
~SUR = 26.06/T
                                                                                      *ff}I        CR    2 Cl ~ Keff)2 y = g*j (, _ g                                   M = 1/(1 - K,gg) = CR g/CR0 I " II ~ 8)! A eff 8 M = (1 - Keff)0/II ~ Eeff)1 p = (K,gg-1)/K,gg = AK,gg/K,gg                             ,      ,
~
j
T = 1.44 DT SCR = S/(1 - K,gg) fa ge \\
                                                                                            ~
o SUR = 26 CR
p=    [t*/TKygg.] + [I/(1 + 1,ggT )]             1* = 1 x 10 seconds P = I4V/(3 x 1010)                                 A,ggA= 0.1 seconds I = No                                         -
= S/(1 - K,gg )
Idgg=1d22 UATER PARAMETERS                                   Id       =1022 g
6-p x
1 gal. = 8.345 lba                                                               2 R/hr = (0.5 CE)/d g,,C,,,)
1(
I gal. = 3.78 liters R/hr = 6 CE/d (feet)                                         .
*ff}I CR Cl ~ Keff)2 T = (1*/o ) + [(f _* p)/A,g,p}
1 ft3 = 7.48 gal.                                 HISCEI.I.ANEOUS CONVERSIONS                             .
~
3 Density'= 62.4 lbm/ft                             1 Curia = 3.7 x 10 dps           10 3
2 y = g*j (, _ g M = 1/(1 - K,gg) = CR /CR g
Density = 1 gm/cm                                 1 kg = 2.21 1he Heat of vato.rizations = 970 Etu/lbm               I hp = 2.54 x 103               BTU /hr Heat of fusien = 144 Btu /lba                     1 N = 3.41 x 10 Btu /hr 0
0 I " II ~ 8)! A 8
1 Atm = 14.7 psi = 29.9 in,l's.                   1 BLu = 778 f t-lbf 1 ft. H 2O = 0.4333 lbf/in                         1' inch = 2.54 cm F = 9/5 C + 32
eff M = (1 - Keff)0/II ~ Eeff)1 p = (K,gg-1)/K,gg = AK,gg/K,gg j
                                                                    *C = 3/9 (*F - 32)
[t*/TKygg.] + [I/(1 + 1,gg )]
1* = 1 x 10 seconds
~
p=
T P = I4V/(3 x 1010)
A,gg = 0.1 seconds A
I = No Idgg=1d22 UATER PARAMETERS Id =10 g
22 2
1 gal. = 8.345 lba R/hr = (0.5 CE)/d g,,C,,,)
I gal. = 3.78 liters R/hr = 6 CE/d (feet) 3 1 ft = 7.48 gal.
HISCEI.I.ANEOUS CONVERSIONS 3
Density'= 62.4 lbm/ft 1 Curia = 3.7 x 10 dps 10 3
Density = 1 gm/cm 1 kg = 2.21 1he Heat of vato.rizations = 970 Etu/lbm I hp = 2.54 x 103 BTU /hr 0
Heat of fusien = 144 Btu /lba 1 N = 3.41 x 10 Btu /hr 1 Atm = 14.7 psi = 29.9 in,l's.
1 BLu = 778 f t-lbf 1 ft. H O = 0.4333 lbf/in 1' inch = 2.54 cm 2
F = 9/5 C + 32
*C = 3/9 (*F - 32)


1' . ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                                                                                           PAGE   2 TMRMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION         1.01                   ( .50)
1'. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
As a subcritical reactor nears criticality, the length of time to reach cquilibrium count rate after an insertion of a given fixed amount of positive reactivity...                                                                                                                         (0.5)
PAGE 2
(SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER)
TMRMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION 1.01
: a.      decreases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core,
(.50)
: b.       increases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.
As a subcritical reactor nears criticality, the length of time to reach cquilibrium count rate after an insertion of a given fixed amount of positive reactivity...
: c.      increases because of a larger number of neutron life cycles required to reach equilibrium.
(0.5)
: d.       decreases because the source neutrons are becoming less important in relation to total neutron population.
(SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER) decreases primarily because of the increased population of delayed a.
QUESTION         1.02                 (1.50)
neutrons in the core, b.
In Keff DEPENDENT or INDEPENDENT of initial source range counts (source rcnge neutron population)?                                                                                                                     (0.5)
increases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.
BRIEFLY EXPLAIN YOUR ANSWER                                                                                                                     (1.0) i QUESTION         1.03                 (2.00)
increases because of a larger number of neutron life cycles required c.
to reach equilibrium.
d.
decreases because the source neutrons are becoming less important in relation to total neutron population.
QUESTION 1.02 (1.50)
In Keff DEPENDENT or INDEPENDENT of initial source range counts (source rcnge neutron population)?
(0.5)
BRIEFLY EXPLAIN YOUR ANSWER (1.0) i QUESTION 1.03 (2.00)
Answer the following TRUE or FALSE:
Answer the following TRUE or FALSE:
: a.       During equilibrium power conditions, the production rate of indirect Xenon from Iodine is faster than the decay rate of Xenon to Cesium.                                                                                                                       (0.5)
a.
: b.       Slowing the rate of a power decrease, lowers the height of the resultant Xenon peak.                                                                                                                 (0.5)
During equilibrium power conditions, the production rate of indirect Xenon from Iodine is faster than the decay rate of Xenon to Cesium.
: c.       The resultant Xenon peak due to a scram from 50% power is larger than one from 100% power.                                                                           ,
(0.5) b.
Slowing the rate of a power decrease, lowers the height of the resultant Xenon peak.
(0.5) c.
The resultant Xenon peak due to a scram from 50% power is larger than one from 100% power.
(0.5) d.
During an increase in power from equilibrium Xenon conditions, Xenon concentration initially decreases.
(0.5)
(0.5)
: d.      During an increase in power from equilibrium Xenon conditions, Xenon concentration initially decreases.                                                                                              (0.5)
(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
!                                    (*****         CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE                           *****)
i m
i
 
  , , _ _ ,         - -      ,     - - , - - ,         , _ . . , .- - , . _ - - - - - - _ m , -, ,,, ,- - _      ,,- . ..- ,_
l l '. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
PAGE 3
THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW fA,i codsf C4OATC.f. U,/b%'blf fe7 MSW>ts* ffA1A5'A2 j
.rc '/ ysiN/ ' fMf?fA1!'t1 (% int, Cassa pducr Li, Mup, core nyrivy d
effects, cme fby etc.),
QUESTION 1.04 (1.00)
What TWO (Tiysica) phenomena (specifically related to the neutron life cycle and fuel characteristics) along with increasing fuel temperature, contribute to a negative doppler coefficient?
NAME THESE TWO (2)
PHENOMENA [0.5 each].
(1.0)
QUESTION 1.05 (1.50)
If the reactor power level is increased on a positive period from 50 MW to 370 MW in two minutes, what is the doubling time?
(Show all uork.)
(1.5)
QUESTION 1.06 (3.00)
Assume that the reactor is being started up with the bulk coolant temperature less than the saturation temperature.
Excessive rod withdrawal ccuses the reactor to increase in power on a short period.
Of the void, doppler, and moderator temperature coefficients, which will come into offect first, second, and third?
BRIEFLY EXPLAIN!
(Assume no operator action to stop the power increase.)
(3.0)
QUESTION 1.07 (1.00)
During a rapid power increase, very short periods can be maintained, yet for rapid power decreases, the period quickly becomes -80 sec.
Explain the reason for the difference.
(1.0)
(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
..-s


l l
1.
l '. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                                                                                        PAGE        3 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW fA,i codsf C4OATC.f. U,/b%'blf fe7 MSW>ts* ffA1A5'A2                                                                      j
' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
                                                .rc '/ dysiN/ ' fMf?fA1!'t1 (% int, Cassa pducr Li, Mup, core nyrivy                                                      l effects, cme fby etc.) ,                                                                      :
PAGE 4
QUESTION                    1.04              (1.00)
TMRMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANS m AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION 1.08 (2.00) 4 The reactor is started up after a refueling outage.
What TWO (Tiysica) phenomena (specifically related to the neutron life cycle and fuel characteristics) along with increasing fuel temperature,                                                                                          l contribute to a negative doppler coefficient?                            NAME THESE TWO (2)                                                                '
Rods are pulled to the 100% line and power is then increased to 100% with recirculation flow.
PHENOMENA [0.5 each].                                                                                                                    (1.0)
QUESTION                    1.05              (1.50)
If the reactor power level is increased on a positive period from 50 MW to 370 MW in two minutes, what is the doubling time?                                                (Show all uork.)                      (1.5)
QUESTION                    1.06              (3.00)
Assume that the reactor is being started up with the bulk coolant temperature less than the saturation temperature.                                                Excessive rod withdrawal ccuses the reactor to increase in power on a short period. Of the void, doppler, and moderator temperature coefficients, which will come into offect first, second, and third?
BRIEFLY EXPLAIN! (Assume no operator action to stop the power increase.)                                                                                                                              (3.0)
QUESTION                    1.07                (1.00)
During a rapid power increase, very short periods can be maintained,                                                                                          1 yet for rapid power decreases, the period quickly becomes -80 sec.                                                                  Explain                  !
the reason for the difference.                                                                                                          (1.0) l l
l
(*****        CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE                          *****)
                                                                                                                                                    ..-s                -
: 1.    ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                             PAGE     4 TMRMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANS m AND FLUID FLOW 1
4 QUESTION       1.08         (2.00)                                                                 l The reactor is started up after a refueling outage.               Rods are pulled to the 100% line and power is then increased to 100% with recirculation flow.
After approximately 20 hours, reactor power has decreased to about 984.
After approximately 20 hours, reactor power has decreased to about 984.
Assume no operator action.
Assume no operator action.
: n.     What is the primary cause for this reduction in power?                     (1.0)
n.
: b.     When whould you expect the power decrease to stop and WHY does it stop?                                                                   (1.0)
What is the primary cause for this reduction in power?
QUESTION       1.09         (1.50)
(1.0) b.
With the reactor operating at 50% power and 50% rated flow, the flow is J       increased to 70% of rated.
When whould you expect the power decrease to stop and WHY does it stop?
Briefly explain the effect on power level.         Include Void and Doppler offects and the effect on boiling boundry.                                         (1.5)
(1.0)
QUESTION       1.10         (1.50)
QUESTION 1.09 (1.50)
: a. In what direction does the value of Beff change over core life (INCREASE, DECREAE)?                                                       (O.5)
With the reactor operating at 50% power and 50% rated flow, the flow is J
: b. Why does the value of Beff change over core life?                           (1.0)
increased to 70% of rated.
QUESTION       1.11         (1.50)
Briefly explain the effect on power level.
: a. Is the thermal limit for MAPRAT less than or greater than 1.07             (0.5)
Include Void and Doppler offects and the effect on boiling boundry.
: b. What is the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR7                       (1.0)         :
(1.5)
Cowhsiiyv : A %4097 U               ""l/ A ' T"ide         ^*"f SR Tbd rdre.e} 4W: th"D/6f.
QUESTION 1.10 (1.50) a.
A/ss M A "/ A 7 e A do nj e rid /Ive/ I d S l Oj        ^'07     ' AO.I l
In what direction does the value of Beff change over core life (INCREASE, DECREAE)?
(*****   CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE       *****)
(O.5) b.
Why does the value of Beff change over core life?
(1.0)
QUESTION 1.11 (1.50) a.
Is the thermal limit for MAPRAT less than or greater than 1.07 (0.5) b.
What is the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR7 (1.0)
A %4097 U ""l/ A ' T"ide ^*"f SR Tbd Cowhsiiyv :
rdre.e} 4W: th"D/6f.
' AO.I A/ss M A "/ A 7 e A do nj e rid /Ive/ I d S l O
^'07 j
(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)


  ' l '. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                     PAGE   5 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW l
' l '. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
QUESTION     1.12         (1.00)                       ,
PAGE 5
Consider a real plant system (NON-IDEAL) with two centrifugal pumps in parallel, one of which is running at 1800 RPM. The second pump is started and run at 1800 RPM. System flow will be ...                   (1.0) 1                                                                                     -
THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW l
SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER
QUESTION 1.12 (1.00)
: a. more than double the original flow due to decreased flow resistance.
Consider a real plant system (NON-IDEAL) with two centrifugal pumps in parallel, one of which is running at 1800 RPM.
: b. slightly less than double the original flow due to increased flow resistance.
The second pump is started and run at 1800 RPM.
: c. the same since only the discharge head changes.
System flow will be...
: d. reduced by one-half due to increased discharge head.
(1.0) 1 SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER a.
QUESTION     1.13         (1.00)
more than double the original flow due to decreased flow resistance.
Of the following operations, which ONE will have a negative effect (reducing effect) on available Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) of a given esntrifugal pump:                                                       (1.0)
b.
SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER                                                       l
slightly less than double the original flow due to increased flow resistance.
: a. Throttling open the pump's suction valve.
c.
: b. Throttling open the pump's discharge valve.
the same since only the discharge head changes.
: c. Decreasing the pump's speed.
reduced by one-half due to increased discharge head.
: d. Decreasing the temperature of the fluid (water) being pumped.
d.
QUESTION     1.14         (1.00)
QUESTION 1.13 (1.00)
Of the following operations, which ONE will have a negative effect (reducing effect) on available Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) of a given esntrifugal pump:
(1.0)
SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER l
a.
Throttling open the pump's suction valve.
b.
Throttling open the pump's discharge valve.
c.
Decreasing the pump's speed.
d.
Decreasing the temperature of the fluid (water) being pumped.
QUESTION 1.14 (1.00)
There is 15 feet of water in the CST whose base is at ground level.
There is 15 feet of water in the CST whose base is at ground level.
The HPCS pump is forty feet below grade. Assuming no friction effects, datermine the pressure (psig) at the HPCS suction. Show all work.       (1.0) i I
The HPCS pump is forty feet below grade.
Assuming no friction effects, datermine the pressure (psig) at the HPCS suction.
Show all work.
(1.0) i I
l I
l I
(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)


* '1 '. 'FRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                         PAGE                                         G TIERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSnx AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION       1.15       (1.50)
* '1 '. 'FRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
PAGE G
TIERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSnx AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION 1.15 (1.50)
The term " critical power" refers to that bundle power level corresponding to the onset of transition boiling (OTB) somewhere in that bundle.
The term " critical power" refers to that bundle power level corresponding to the onset of transition boiling (OTB) somewhere in that bundle.
State how critical power varies (ie. INCREASES, DECREASES, or IS NOT AFFECTED) by each of the following:                                                                               (1.5)
State how critical power varies (ie. INCREASES, DECREASES, or IS NOT AFFECTED) by each of the following:
: c. If coolant mass flow rate increases
(1.5) c.
: b.     If reactor pressure increases
If coolant mass flow rate increases b.
: c. If inlet subcooling increases QUESTION       1.16       (3.50)
If reactor pressure increases c.
: a. List FOUR parameters which contribute to AVAILABLE NFSH for a recirculation pump. Limit your answer to those parameters which are directly available in the control room.                                                               (2.0)
If inlet subcooling increases QUESTION 1.16 (3.50) a.
: b. Consider two RPV conditions:     low power and low flow (<10%) OR high power and high flow (>85%).
List FOUR parameters which contribute to AVAILABLE NFSH for a recirculation pump.
: 1. During which condition is REQUIRED NPSH for a recirculation pump greater?                                                                                         (0.5)
Limit your answer to those parameters which are directly available in the control room.
: 2. During which condition is AVAILABLE NPSH for a recirculation pump greater and WHY is it greater?                                                                   (1.0) l
(2.0) b.
(***** END OF CATEGORY 01   *****)
Consider two RPV conditions:
i l
low power and low flow (<10%) OR high power and high flow (>85%).
I
1.
During which condition is REQUIRED NPSH for a recirculation pump greater?
(0.5) 2.
During which condition is AVAILABLE NPSH for a recirculation pump greater and WHY is it greater?
(1.0) l
(***** END OF CATEGORY 01 *****)


, - ' 7:   :Pr. ANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS             PAGE   7 QUESTION       2.01         ( .50)
, - ' 7:
At High Reactor pressures (1000 psig), what specific component .n the CRD mechanism allows vessel pressure to assist in the scram process for an individual rod.                                             (0.5)
:Pr. ANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 7
QUESTION       2.02         (2.50)
QUESTION 2.01
(.50)
At High Reactor pressures (1000 psig), what specific component.n the CRD mechanism allows vessel pressure to assist in the scram process for an individual rod.
(0.5)
QUESTION 2.02 (2.50)
Concerning the Recirculation Pump Trip (RPT) circuit, provide the following:
Concerning the Recirculation Pump Trip (RPT) circuit, provide the following:
: a. What action occurs following an RPT signal (specific to the recirc system)?                                                           (0.5)
a.
: b. Why is it more important at EOL than BOL?                           (1.0)
What action occurs following an RPT signal (specific to the recirc system)?
: c. When is it automatically bypassed?                                   (0.5)
(0.5) b.
: d. How and where is it manually bypassed?                             (0.25)
Why is it more important at EOL than BOL?
: o. Is the logic (choose one)                                         (0.25)
(1.0) c.
: 1. 1 out of 2
When is it automatically bypassed?
: 2. 2 out of 3
(0.5) d.
: 3. 1 out 2 taken twice
How and where is it manually bypassed?
: 4. 2 out of 4 I
(0.25) o.
l
Is the logic (choose one)
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
(0.25) 1.
1 out of 2 2.
2 out of 3 3.
1 out 2 taken twice 4.
2 out of 4 I
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
I
I
                  ^
^
m r.y amy
m r.y amy


2 '. ' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERCENCY SYSTEMS                               PAGE   8 1
2 '. ' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERCENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 8
QUESTION       2.03             (2.50)
QUESTION 2.03 (2.50)
: c. Concerning the Nuclear Steam Supply Shutoff System (NSSSS), Match the following group number with the below brief descriptions of the Isolation Groups.                                                                 (1.4)
Concerning the Nuclear Steam Supply Shutoff System (NSSSS), Match the c.
GROUP                                           DESCRIPTION 1                         a. Reactor water sample valves 2                         b. Reactor water cleanup 3                         c. RHR and TIP system 4                         d. MSIV's and main steam line drains 5                         e. Primary and secondary containment ventilation and purge systems 6                         f. RHR (shutdown cooling mode) 7                         g. Miscellaneous balance of plant (RCCW, fuel pool cooling, circ water, ect.)         [7 9 0.2 each]
following group number with the below brief descriptions of the Isolation Groups.
: b. From the following list, select which NSSSS pushbutton or combinations of pushbuttons must be pushed to cause the following actions:                       (1.1)
(1.4)
: 1. All MSIV's to close and an inboard isolation of Groups 1,                 2, 5, 6, and 7.                                                         x
GROUP DESCRIPTION 1
: 2. Trip (close) all MSIV's.
a.
: 3. Inbd NSSSS Groups 1 (except MSIV's), 2, 5, 6, and 7.
Reactor water sample valves 2
: 4. Outbd NSSSS Groups 1 (except MSIV's), 2, 5, 6 and 7.
b.
: 5. All MSIV's to close and an outboard isolation of Groups 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7.
Reactor water cleanup 3
c.
RHR and TIP system 4
d.
MSIV's and main steam line drains 5
e.
Primary and secondary containment ventilation and purge systems 6
f.
RHR (shutdown cooling mode) 7 g.
Miscellaneous balance of plant (RCCW, fuel pool cooling, circ water, ect.)
[7 9 0.2 each]
b.
From the following list, select which NSSSS pushbutton or combinations of pushbuttons must be pushed to cause the following actions:
(1.1) 1.
All MSIV's to close and an inboard isolation of Groups 1, 2,
5, 6, and 7.
x 2.
Trip (close) all MSIV's.
3.
Inbd NSSSS Groups 1 (except MSIV's), 2, 5, 6, and 7.
4.
Outbd NSSSS Groups 1 (except MSIV's), 2, 5, 6 and 7.
5.
All MSIV's to close and an outboard isolation of Groups 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7.
NSSSS PUSHBUTTON OR COMBINATIONS B
NSSSS PUSHBUTTON OR COMBINATIONS B
C and D.
C and D.
A and B A or C AND B or D D
A and B A or C AND B or D D
(*****     CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE         *****)
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
: 2. PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                   PAGE       9 QUESTION   2.04       (1.00)                                             ,
 
2.
PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 9
QUESTION 2.04 (1.00)
FILL IN THE BLANKS.
FILL IN THE BLANKS.
The leak detection system sensitivity and response time is such that an unidentified leakage rate increase of               in less than             will be detected.                                               (1.0)
The leak detection system sensitivity and response time is such that an unidentified leakage rate increase of in less than will be detected.
QUESTION   2.05       (2.00)
(1.0)
: c. What are the High flow alarm setpoints from the drywell equipment and floor drain sumps?                                                     (1.0) i                                                                                           l
QUESTION 2.05 (2.00) c.
: b. What TWO components generate the High Flow Alarms?                         .(1.0)
What are the High flow alarm setpoints from the drywell equipment and floor drain sumps?
QUESTION   2.06       (1.75)
(1.0) i l
: a. List THREE different components that are most likely to cause radioactive leakage into the RCCW system.                                 (0.75)
b.
: b. What are TWO alarms that would indicate radioactive Inleakage?                                               ,                (0.5)
What TWO components generate the High Flow Alarms?
: c. What automatic action could occur ir: the event of radioactive inleakage?                                                                 (0.5)
.(1.0)
QUESTION   2.07         ( .50)
QUESTION 2.06 (1.75) a.
List THREE different components that are most likely to cause radioactive leakage into the RCCW system.
(0.75) b.
What are TWO alarms that would indicate radioactive Inleakage?
(0.5) c.
What automatic action could occur ir: the event of radioactive inleakage?
(0.5)
QUESTION 2.07
(.50)
Although the HPCS can serve as a backup for the RCIC system, why is its use in this capacity not recommended unless required by plant conditions? (0.5)
Although the HPCS can serve as a backup for the RCIC system, why is its use in this capacity not recommended unless required by plant conditions? (0.5)
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)


  '2.   'FLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                                   PAGE       10 QUESTION   2.08             (2.00)
'2.
What affect would closing the RCIC exhaust line isolation valve RCIC V-68 have under the following conditions:             Explain your answer.
'FLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 10 QUESTION 2.08 (2.00)
What affect would closing the RCIC exhaust line isolation valve RCIC V-68 have under the following conditions:
Explain your answer.
(Confine your answer to the RCIC system only.)
(Confine your answer to the RCIC system only.)
i   a. Just prior to receiving an automatic initiation signal.                                     (1.0)
i Just prior to receiving an automatic initiation signal.
: b. After receiving an automatic initiation signal (assume RCIC is injecting).                                                                             (1.0)
(1.0) a.
QUESTION   2.09             (2.00)
b.
Draw a one line sketch of the pneumatic supply system to a typical ADS valve. Indicate the sources of the pneumatic supply, power supply, and normal state (open closed energized deenergized of any valves).                                   (2.0)
After receiving an automatic initiation signal (assume RCIC is injecting).
QUESTION     2.10             (3.00)
(1.0)
: n. In accordance with ppm 5.1.3, Reactor Power Control, SLC injection will be initiated when what plant conditions exist?                                         (1.0)
QUESTION 2.09 (2.00)
: b. List FOUR automatic actions that occur when the keylock switch is turned to System "A".                                                                     (2.0)
Draw a one line sketch of the pneumatic supply system to a typical ADS valve.
                                                                                                                .\
Indicate the sources of the pneumatic supply, power supply, and normal state (open closed energized deenergized of any valves).
(*****       CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE   *****)
(2.0)
1 l
QUESTION 2.10 (3.00)
In accordance with ppm 5.1.3, Reactor Power Control, SLC injection n.
will be initiated when what plant conditions exist?
(1.0) b.
List FOUR automatic actions that occur when the keylock switch is turned to System "A".
(2.0)
.\\
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)


  * ~ 2.
* ~ 2.
* PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS               PAGE   11 QUESTION     2.11         (3.25)
* PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 11 QUESTION 2.11 (3.25)
Concerning the off-gas system.
Concerning the off-gas system.
: a. List the following items in the correct order of system flow path.
a.
from the second stage air ejector to the elevated release point.   (2.1)
List the following items in the correct order of system flow path.
: 1. Off-gas condenser
from the second stage air ejector to the elevated release point.
: 2. Off-gas catalytic recombiner
(2.1) 1.
: 3. Off-gas cooler condensers
Off-gas condenser 2.
: 4. Off-gas moisture separators
Off-gas catalytic recombiner 3.
: 5. Off-gas preheaters
Off-gas cooler condensers 4.
: 6. Off-gas water separator
Off-gas moisture separators 5.
: 7. Off-gas gas prefilters
Off-gas preheaters 6.
: 8. Off-gas gas coolers
Off-gas water separator 7.
: 9. Off-gas hydrogen analyzers.
Off-gas gas prefilters 8.
: 10. Off-gas after filters
Off-gas gas coolers 9.
: 11. 10 minute holdup
Off-gas hydrogen analyzers.
              '12. Off-gas charcoal adsorbers
10.
                -13.-Of t-see 1 glyco 1-cooling system per scran//y su off-y cmpwen.
Off-gas after filters 11.
: 14. Off-gas desiccant dryers
10 minute holdup
: b. Briefly describe the interrelationship and function provided to the off-gas system by the CAS system.                                 (1.15)
'12.
E       Qwo-]t QUESTION     2.12         (3.00)
Off-gas charcoal adsorbers
Provide a brief description of the THREE different water supplied sprinkler cystems used in the Fire Protection Systems. Include in your answer the cetions that must occur in the system to start water flow to a fire.       (3.0)
-13.-Of t-see 1 glyco 1-cooling system per scran//y su off-y cmpwen.
QUESTION     2.13         ( .50)
14.
Off-gas desiccant dryers b.
Briefly describe the interrelationship and function provided to the off-gas system by the CAS system.
(1.15)
E Qwo-]t QUESTION 2.12 (3.00)
Provide a brief description of the THREE different water supplied sprinkler cystems used in the Fire Protection Systems.
Include in your answer the cetions that must occur in the system to start water flow to a fire.
(3.0)
QUESTION 2.13
(.50)
TRUE of FALSE?
TRUE of FALSE?
Each DC system has sufficient capacity to supply the DC load requirements of its respective division under conditions of a DBA for at least 4 hours without battery chargers.                                                 (0.5)
Each DC system has sufficient capacity to supply the DC load requirements of its respective division under conditions of a DBA for at least 4 hours without battery chargers.
(0.5)
-1
-1
(*****   CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)


~
~
: 2. ' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS             PAGE   12 i
2.
l QUESTION   2.14       ( .50)                                                       l l
' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 12 i
TRUE or FALSE?                                                                     )
l QUESTION 2.14
The main generat,or reverse power relay 67G provides the protection for the turbine and power system, not the generator.                               ;
(.50)
TRUE or FALSE?
)
The main generat,or reverse power relay 67G provides the protection for the turbine and power system, not the generator.
i i
i i
1 i
i
(***** END OF CATEGORY 02 *****)
(***** END OF CATEGORY 02 *****)
: 3. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                                                     PAGE           13 QUESTION       3.01         (2.75)
 
Concerning the "setpoint setdown" circuit in the feedwater level control circuit,
3.
: a. What is the function?                                                                           (0.75)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 13 QUESTION 3.01 (2.75)
: b. How is the actuation signal for the system sensed?                                                 (0.5)
Concerning the "setpoint setdown" circuit in the feedwater level control
: c. List TWO automatic actions that occur when the system is actuated.                                                                                         (1.0)
: circuit, a.
: d. What action occurs when the system is reset (Include Rate Time Frame)?                                                                                       (0.5)
What is the function?
QUESTION       3.02         (1.75)
(0.75) b.
How is the actuation signal for the system sensed?
(0.5)
List TWO automatic actions that occur when the system is c.
actuated.
(1.0) d.
What action occurs when the system is reset (Include Rate Time Frame)?
(0.5)
QUESTION 3.02 (1.75)
Concerning the feedwater level control system:
Concerning the feedwater level control system:
: a. What effect will a loss of one steam flow transmitter (fails downscale) have on the following indications (DECREASE, INCREASE or REMAIN THE SAME).                                                                     (1.5)
a.
What effect will a loss of one steam flow transmitter (fails downscale) have on the following indications (DECREASE, INCREASE or REMAIN THE SAME).
(1.5)
Consider BOTH transient and final conditions.
Consider BOTH transient and final conditions.
Transient           Final
Transient Final 1.
: 1. Reactor vessel level
Reactor vessel level 2.
: 2. Feedwater flow
Feedwater flow 3.
: 3. Total indicated steam flow
Total indicated steam flow b.
: b. Will this failure cause a reactor scram when operating in three element control at 100% power?                                                                   (0.25)
Will this failure cause a reactor scram when operating in three element control at 100% power?
QUESTION       3.03         (2.00)
(0.25)
QUESTION 3.03 (2.00)
Concerning the HPCS Diesel Generator Governor Droop Switch (DROOP / ISO).
Concerning the HPCS Diesel Generator Governor Droop Switch (DROOP / ISO).
: a. Provide a brief description when each position is used.                                             (1.0)
a.
: b. What is the normal setting of this switch.                                                       (0.25)               l c.(Howmuch" DROOP"isinsertedand)whyisitcontrolled?                                                     (0.75) can Wt .rcope d fS'202.?     -  way     p ros/* jn r risarco . . . n ucy n ons- se on ts" 7 ==y exs u M m r seeussar, , ,
Provide a brief description when each position is used.
j
(1.0) b.
What is the normal setting of this switch.
(0.25) c.(Howmuch" DROOP"isinsertedand)whyisitcontrolled?
(0.75) can Wt.rcope d fS'202.?
way p ros/* jn r risarco... n ucy j
n ons-se on ts" 7==y exs u M m r seeussar,,,
(/
(/
(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)                             '"'M ' =h 1
(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
'"' ' =h M


3 '. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                             PAGE         14 QUESTION       3.04         (2,50)
3 '.
Concerning the SRM retract permissive interlock,
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 14 QUESTION 3.04 (2,50)
: a. What are TWO conditions that generate this Interlock?               (0.75)
Concerning the SRM retract permissive interlock, What are TWO conditions that generate this Interlock?
: b. List THREE manual and automatic conditions that bypass this Interlock.                                                             (1.5)
(0.75) a.
: c. Will this Interlock stop detector movement when actuated?           (0.25)
b.
QUESTION       3.05         (2.75)
List THREE manual and automatic conditions that bypass this Interlock.
(1.5)
Will this Interlock stop detector movement when actuated?
(0.25) c.
QUESTION 3.05 (2.75)
Refer to the attached Figure 1 of Pulse Height vs. Applied Voltage.
Refer to the attached Figure 1 of Pulse Height vs. Applied Voltage.
: a. Identify the following areas (Region).                                 (1.0) 2 3
a.
Identify the following areas (Region).
(1.0) 2 3
5 6
5 6
: b. In what area is each of the following detectors operated.
b.
(Identify by number.)                                                 (1.75)
In what area is each of the following detectors operated.
: 1. SRM
(Identify by number.)
: 2. IRM
(1.75) 1.
: 3. Fuel load dunking chamber
SRM 2.
: 4. Area radiation monitors (ARMS)
IRM 3.
: 5. Main steam line rad monitors
Fuel load dunking chamber 4.
: 6. Portable frisker station
Area radiation monitors (ARMS) 5.
: 7. Dose rate setting portable instrument (CUTIE PIE or RAD OWL)
Main steam line rad monitors 6.
QUESTION       3.06       (1.00)
Portable frisker station 7.
Dose rate setting portable instrument (CUTIE PIE or RAD OWL)
QUESTION 3.06 (1.00)
FILL IN THE BLANKS.
FILL IN THE BLANKS.
Transition from startup to run must be made with all APRMs between
Transition from startup to run must be made with all APRMs between
                    % and.           % power to prevent a rod block.               (1.0)
% and.
(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
% power to prevent a rod block.
(1.0)
(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
 
9 O
~O PULSE HEIGHT VS.
~
APPLIED VOLTAGE ZERO GAS l
GAS
/
g g/
g AMPLiflCATION l
AMPLIFICATION g
4 kj4 y
]
10" l
1 I
I i
i 1080 l
l 1
I 108 l
l I
l l t l
l 1E I
l l
l l
 
Pu 10' I
9                                    O
b I
                                                                                                                                        ~O .
IR I
PULSE HEIGHT VS.
I i
                                                                                                                                              ~
i uj 10' I
APPLIED VOLTAGE ZERO GAS                  GAS g//
M 3
l                      g                                  g AMPLiflCATION  l        AMPLIFICATION  g                          ,      ,, -
l l
4                    kj4                      y
W i
                                                                                              ]
i l
10"  -                      !                      !                          l      1 I                      I                                  i i
l l
1080                        l                      l                                  I 1
I 8
108  -
105 - s I
l            l l t      l                                  I l                                                  l Pu 10' -
l g
I 1E      I                            l      l b
g i
10' I
l
i            IR       I                     . I       i uj I
\\ I5l l'* ^a li z
                                    ;  3         l       l                     W         M
5 l
    "                                                                                  i      i l                                                                         '
E I
                            "                    l         l                           I 8 105 - s     l                 g         ,        ,                    g     i I
l a
I5l l'*         z         5     l   E         I l                     \
,0 i
,0   ^a li
* i i
l        i I
i i
i i
I 102   -
I i
i                      l                           I       I 1           I         i                           I       I l
I i
102                         l l
102 i
l I
I l
1 I
i I
I l
102 l
l l
l l
l
l
        ,0,     .
'l l
i l
r
,0, l
i I
I i
i 100 I
I I
I I
i i
I I
N i
i l
i l
                                                'l i
l I
i I
i I
l i
i M
r' 100
O APPLIED VOLTAGE h
                -      '            I I        I                            '      '
PULSE HEIGHT VS. APPLIED VOLTAGE FOR GAS FILTER DETECTORS i
I            I            i        i                            I      I                                        N i              i            l        i                            I      i                                        M
;            O                           APPLIED VOLTAGE                                                                                     h i
PULSE HEIGHT VS. APPLIED VOLTAGE FOR GAS FILTER DETECTORS                                                 "'''''"''
icune /
icune /
i
i


'3.   ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                             PAGE   15 btN'gg\l d\dS) fg jfn[i f04 ubW j
'3.
                                                                            ~
' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 15 btN'gg\\ d\\dS) l fg pW jfn[i
pW QUESTION       3.07       (2.25)                                               c 9.
~
: o.      List FOUR conditions that   could actuate the APRM flow bias 3 M (1.0)
f04 ub j c 9.
W QUESTION 3.07 (2.25)
List FOUR conditions that could actuate the APRM flow bias 3 M o.
off-normal annunciator.
Include applicable setpoints.
Include applicable setpoints.
off-normal annunciator.
(1.0) b.
: b. What protective function (s) would occur as a result of this annunciator?                                                         (0.25)
What protective function (s) would occur as a result of this annunciator?
: c. What effect on system operation would occur if flow
(0.25) c.
        ~cc.T.;ut:r A is bypassed?   (Limit your response to the APRM C ' flow computer-)                                                         (1.0) commroe J QUESTION       3.08       (2.50)
What effect on system operation would occur if flow
~cc.T.;ut:r A is bypassed?
(Limit your response to the APRM C ' flow computer-)
(1.0) commroe J QUESTION 3.08 (2.50)
Concerning the RBM Gain Change Circuit.
Concerning the RBM Gain Change Circuit.
: a.     What is the purpose of the gain change circuit?                       (0.5)
a.
: b.     List TWO reasons for increasing the gain of a RBM channel.             (1.0)
What is the purpose of the gain change circuit?
: c.      What are the reference APRM inputs to RBM Channels A and B (normal and alternate)?                                               (1.0)
(0.5) b.
QUES TION     3.09       (2.00)
List TWO reasons for increasing the gain of a RBM channel.
(1.0)
What are the reference APRM inputs to RBM Channels A and B c.
(normal and alternate)?
(1.0)
QUES TION 3.09 (2.00)
Concerning Excess Flow Check Valves.
Concerning Excess Flow Check Valves.
Q.     What is their function?                                               (0.5)
Q.
: b. What type of lines are they installed in.                             (0,5)
What is their function?
: c. What is the function of the bypass valve?     How is an excess flow check valve reopened following an automatic initiation?               (0.5)
(0.5) b.
: d. Where is excess flow check valve position displayed.
What type of lines are they installed in.
(Be specific, area and panel.)                                       (0.5) l
(0,5) c.
(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE   *****)
What is the function of the bypass valve?
: 3. ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                             PAGE   16 QUESTION     3.10       (1.50)
How is an excess flow check valve reopened following an automatic initiation?
(0.5) d.
Where is excess flow check valve position displayed.
(Be specific, area and panel.)
(0.5)
(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
 
3.
' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 16 QUESTION 3.10 (1.50)
When operating at 100% power, the wide range level instrument reads 15-20 inches lower than the narrow range indicator.
When operating at 100% power, the wide range level instrument reads 15-20 inches lower than the narrow range indicator.
: a. Is this mismatch a concern for the operator?     Explain your answer.                                                              (0.75).
a.
: b. Can the wide range level instrument be used to accurately indicate level at TOP of Active Fuel (TAF). Explain your answer.                                                              (0.75)
Is this mismatch a concern for the operator?
QUESTION     3.11       (2.00)
Explain your (0.75).
answer.
b.
Can the wide range level instrument be used to accurately indicate level at TOP of Active Fuel (TAF).
Explain your (0.75) answer.
QUESTION 3.11 (2.00)
Concerning the recire flow control system.
Concerning the recire flow control system.
: a. List THREE automatic actions that occur upon receipt of a High Drywell Pressure signal (>1.68 psig).     (Limit your response to the recire flow control system.)                                       (1.5)
a.
: b. What is the basis for these automatic actions?                         (0.5)
List THREE automatic actions that occur upon receipt of a High Drywell Pressure signal (>1.68 psig).
QUESTION     3.12       (2.00)
(Limit your response to the recire flow control system.)
During normal operation of the TIP SYSTEM,
(1.5) b.
: c. List two automatic actions initiated by a HIGH drywell pressure signal (>1.68 psig).     (Limit your response to the TIP system.)     (1.0)
What is the basis for these automatic actions?
: b. List two indications that the TIP operator could use to verify that the automatic actions had taken place.                                   (1.0) l l
(0.5)
1
QUESTION 3.12 (2.00)
(***** END OF CATEGORY 03 *****)
During normal operation of the TIP SYSTEM, c.
List two automatic actions initiated by a HIGH drywell pressure signal (>1.68 psig).
(Limit your response to the TIP system.)
(1.0) b.
List two indications that the TIP operator could use to verify that the automatic actions had taken place.
(1.0)
(***** END OF CATEGORY 03 *****)
i
i
: 4. ' PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND                     PAGE   17 ,
* 4.
RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION   4.01       (1.00)
' PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 17 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION 4.01 (1.00)
What guidelines must be used by an operator prior to securing or placing en ECCS in manual?                                                     (1.0)
What guidelines must be used by an operator prior to securing or placing en ECCS in manual?
QUESTION   4.02       ( .50)
(1.0)
What actions are required if an individuals TLD is lost or damaged?     (0.5)
QUESTION 4.02
QUESTION   4.03       (1.00)
(.50)
Under what TWO conditions may the operator deviate from an approved procedure?                                                             (1.0)
What actions are required if an individuals TLD is lost or damaged?
QUESTION   4.04       ( .50)
(0.5)
QUESTION 4.03 (1.00)
Under what TWO conditions may the operator deviate from an approved procedure?
(1.0)
QUESTION 4.04
(.50)
What action is required for the following condition concerning the rGactor recirc pumps during normal power operation?
What action is required for the following condition concerning the rGactor recirc pumps during normal power operation?
Loss of both seal injection flow and RCCW seal cooling flow.           (0.5)
Loss of both seal injection flow and RCCW seal cooling flow.
QUESTION   4.05         (1.50)
(0.5)
: a. Following a recire pump trip, the plant operating procedure directs the operator to close the recire pump discharge valve and then reopen it? What is the basis for this action?                     (1.0)
QUESTION 4.05 (1.50) a.
: b. When is it reopened?                                               (0.5) l l
Following a recire pump trip, the plant operating procedure directs the operator to close the recire pump discharge valve and then reopen it?
l
What is the basis for this action?
(*****   CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
(1.0) b.
1
When is it reopened?
: 4.   ' PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY A@                         PAGE   16 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION       4.06       (2.00)
(0.5) l
(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
 
4.
' PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY A@
PAGE 16 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION 4.06 (2.00)
When withdrawing control rods, Plant Startup Procedure 3.1.2 requires a valid coupling check be performed.
When withdrawing control rods, Plant Startup Procedure 3.1.2 requires a valid coupling check be performed.
l
Explain how a valid coupling check is made.
: a. Explain how a valid coupling check is made.                           (1.5)
(1.5) a.
: b. What indication will tell the operator the rod is uncoupled?                                                             (0.5)
b.
QUESTION     4.07       ( .50)
What indication will tell the operator the rod is uncoupled?
(0.5)
QUESTION 4.07
(.50)
TRUE or FALSE?
TRUE or FALSE?
With the RSCS inoperable, whenever power is less than or equal to 20% rated thermal power, normal control rod movement is permitted if the RWM is operable.                                                                     (0.5)
With the RSCS inoperable, whenever power is less than or equal to 20% rated thermal power, normal control rod movement is permitted if the RWM is operable.
QUESTION     4.08       (2.00)
(0.5)
QUESTION 4.08 (2.00)
FILL IN THE BLANKS.
FILL IN THE BLANKS.
ours/WF cope of ES-D2 (Anackdb
ours/WF cope of ES-D2 (Anackdb a.
: a. When forced cooling is not available in cold shutdown condition, reactor water level shall be maintained at or above               .
When forced cooling is not available in cold shutdown condition, reactor water level shall be maintained at or above If for any reason water level cannot be maintained above this level in this condition, reactor vessel temperature shall be monitored once per (1.5) b.
If for any reason water level cannot be maintained above this level in this condition, reactor vessel             temperature shall be monitored once per             .                                      (1.5)
Why is the vessel water level raised in this condition?
: b. Why is the vessel water level raised in this condition?                 (0.5)
(0.5)
QUESTION     4.09         (2.00) f
QUESTION 4.09 (2.00) a.
: a. List THREE parameters or actions that the operator should check
List THREE parameters or actions that the operator should check f
  /         or preform prior to restarting the condensate booster pumps I           following a scram.                                   [3 0 0.5 each]   (1.5)
/
: b. Why are these actions necessary?                                       (0,5)
or preform prior to restarting the condensate booster pumps I
Ax, n .sans 70 4 sawye rAe scope of a.202 bdd)
following a scram.
(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
[3 0 0.5 each]
(1.5) b.
Why are these actions necessary?
(0,5)
Ax, n.sans 70 4 sawye rAe scope of a.202 bdd)
(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)


  ' 4.     PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND                             PAGE   19 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION       4.10         (2.75)
' 4.
PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 19 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION 4.10 (2.75)
While operating at 100% rated thermal power, a HPCS actuation occurs.
While operating at 100% rated thermal power, a HPCS actuation occurs.
: c. How will the following parameters respond to the automatic actions of the plants control systems (INCREASE, DECREASE or REMAIN THE SAME)?                                                                      (1.0)
How will the following parameters respond to the automatic actions c.
: 1. Feedwater flow
of the plants control systems (INCREASE, DECREASE or REMAIN THE (1.0)
: 2. Reactor vessel level
SAME)?
: 3. Steam flow
1.
          ,4. Thermal power
Feedwater flow 2.
: b. What are the THREE immediate operator actions required per Procedure 4.4.4.2, Inadvertent HPCS Startup?                               (1.75)   ;
Reactor vessel level 3.
QUESTION       4.11         ( .50)
Steam flow
,4.
Thermal power b.
What are the THREE immediate operator actions required per Procedure 4.4.4.2, Inadvertent HPCS Startup?
(1.75)
QUESTION 4.11
(.50)
TRUE or FALSE?
TRUE or FALSE?
      'HPCS and RCIC suctions will automatically transfer from the suppression pool to the CST on high suppression pool level.                                   (0.5)
'HPCS and RCIC suctions will automatically transfer from the suppression pool to the CST on high suppression pool level.
QUESTION       4.12         (2.75)
(0.5)
QUESTION 4.12 (2.75)
List the FIVE entry conditions for RPV pressure control (RPV/P).
List the FIVE entry conditions for RPV pressure control (RPV/P).
Include applicable setpoints.                                                   (2.75)
Include applicable setpoints.
QUESTION       4.13         (1.50)
(2.75)
Define adequate core cooling, as used in the Emergency Procedures and Standing Operating Orders.                                                         (1.5)   l 1
QUESTION 4.13 (1.50)
                                                                                                  )
Define adequate core cooling, as used in the Emergency Procedures and Standing Operating Orders.
                            .                                                                      l QUESTION     4.14         (1.50)
(1.5)
In order of preference, what are THREE viable mechanisms which can assure                 !
)
cdequate core cooling is achieved?                                               (1.5)
l QUESTION 4.14 (1.50)
(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE   *****)
In order of preference, what are THREE viable mechanisms which can assure cdequate core cooling is achieved?
(1.5)
(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)
i
i
            ' PROCEDURES'- NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND                                PAGE          23
:4.
:4.
RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL
' PROCEDURES'- NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 23 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL
                                                                                        'l QUESTION         .15 -       (2.50)           g           g     g       g , g ;3 O uT S t   %A7 5     A.                                                 \
'l QUESTION
                /                                                        t e RCIC system the
.15 -
: a. 'While conducting a           ull flow survei       ance                                                           )
(2.50) g g
operator shall verify *that the suppress on pool temperature is s
g g, g ;3
less than       a.1.       degt s F at       st once per         a.2.
/
minutes.                                                                      (1.0)
O uT S t
%A7 5 A.
\\
: a. 'While conducting a ull flow survei ance t e RCIC system the
)
operator shall verify *that the suppress on pool temperature is less than a.1.
degt s F at st once per a.2.
s (1.0) minutes.
{
{
          . In accordance with Tech         pecs.,       AT actions are required if suppression pool te         ature reache     110 degrees F?                 (1,5
In accordance with Tech pecs.,
            ~
AT actions are required if suppression pool te ature reache 110 degrees F?
y                                                             /
(1,5
QUESTION         4.16         (2.50)
/
y
~
QUESTION 4.16 (2.50)
Control Room Evacuation Procedure 4.12.1.1 discusses the immediate actions corried out by each of the reactor operators in the control room if an evacuation is ordered.
Control Room Evacuation Procedure 4.12.1.1 discusses the immediate actions corried out by each of the reactor operators in the control room if an evacuation is ordered.
: c.      List FOUR immediate operator actions that would be carried out by the operator assigned to the " Reactor Controls".                                   (2.0)
List FOUR immediate operator actions that would be carried out by the c.
: b.     Who has the authority to order an evacuation of the control room? (0.5) t
operator assigned to the " Reactor Controls".
(***** END OF CATEGORY 04     *****)
(2.0) b.
(*************     END OF EXAMINATION     ***************)
Who has the authority to order an evacuation of the control room? (0.5) t
(***** END OF CATEGORY 04 *****)
(************* END OF EXAMINATION ***************)
 
~
* PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION, FACE 21 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
MASTER COPY
^^"#
9 #" ' '
#nt(ItW LUrY,5 ANSWER 1.01
(.50)
(0.5)
?/syIt c
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory-Student Text, Ch. III, P. 20 Ch. VI, PP. 1 and 2 ANSWER 1.02 (1.50)
INDEPENDENT (0.5)
Koff (the neutron life cycle) only considers fission neutrons in the self-sustaining reaction.
(1.0)
REFERENCE Reactor Theory - Student Text, Ch. VI, P. 2
)
ANSWER 1.03 (2.00) a.
TRUE b.
TRUE c.
FALSE d.
TRUE
[4 9 0.5 each]
(2.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory - Student Text, Ch. V, PP. 1-4 ANSWER 1.04 (1.00) 1.
Doppler Effect (resonance broadening-neutron absorbtion at other than descrete energies).
(0.5) 2.
Self-Shielding (heterogeneous fuel pins).
(0.5) l REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. IV, P. 9 l


  ~
C PRINCIP N OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
* PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION,                      FACE    21 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW                                     '
PAGE 22 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2
ANSWERS -- WNP-2                         -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
MASTER COPY ANSWER       1.01      ( .50)               9  #"  ' '
ANSWER 1.05 (1.50)
                                                  #nt(ItW LUrY,5
P = Poe t/T 370 = 50e 120 sec/T (0.5)
                                                                ^^"#      "
T = 59.95 sec (0.5)
c                                                                            (0.5)
T X Doubling Time = ----------- 1.445 (0,5)
                                                                        ?/syIt            -
DT = 41.49 see REFERENCE Reactor Theory Student Text, Chapter III, PP. 14 and 15 ANSWER 1.06 (3.00) n.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory-Student Text, Ch. III, P. 20 Ch. VI, PP. 1 and 2 ANSWER       1.02      (1.50)                                                         1 INDEPENDENT                                                                  (0.5)
FIRST:
Koff (the neutron life cycle) only considers fission neutrons in the self-sustaining reaction.                                                     (1.0) 1 I
Doppler deals with fuel temperature, and this will be the first parameter to change.
REFERENCE                                                                             ,
(1.0) b.
Reactor Theory - Student Text, Ch. VI, P. 2                                            )
Second:
ANSWER       1.03      (2.00)
Moderator temperature coefficient begins adding negative reactivity as soon as sufficient heat is transferred to the coolant to raise coolant temperature.
: a. TRUE
(1.0) c.
: b. TRUE
Third:
: c. FALSE
Void coefficient will have little or no effect until saturation temperature is reached.
: d. TRUE                                                [4 9 0.5 each]     (2.0)
(1.0)
REFERENCE                                                                             l WNP-2, Reactor Theory - Student Text, Ch. V, PP. 1-4 ANSWER       1.04      (1.00)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VIII, PP. 26 and 27 ANSWER 1.07 (1.00)
: 1. Doppler Effect (resonance broadening-neutron absorbtion at other than descrete energies).                                         (0.5)
The period during power increase is governed by how quickly the neutron population can increase. [0.5]
: 2. Self-Shielding (heterogeneous fuel pins).                             (0.5) l REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. IV, P. 9 l
The same holds true on a power decrease, J
however, the neutron population is dominated by the longest lived delayed neutron precursor. [0.5]
This decays with -80 sec. period.
(1.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VI, P.
16 ANSWER 1.08 (2.00) a.
As.the reactor operates at power, Xenon builds in to equilibrium [0.5],
adding negative ' reactivity, causing power to decrease (0.5].
(1.0) b.
In 40-50 hours [0.5] when equilibrium Xenon is reached [0.5].
(1.0) i m... _ _. _.,, _


PAGE                        22 C PRINCIP N OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
1.
THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                      -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
ANSWER            1.05                (1.50)
PAGE 23 THERMODINAMICS. HEAT TRANS m AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2
P = Poe t/T                                                                                                                (0.5) 370 = 50e 120 sec/T T = 59.95 sec                                                                                                            (0.5)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
T X Doubling Time = ----------- 1.445                                                                                      (0,5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Chapter V, P 9 of 10 ANSWER 1.09 (1.50)
DT = 41.49 see REFERENCE Reactor Theory Student Text, Chapter III, PP. 14 and 15 ANSWER            1.06                (3.00)
Qh q, 4
: n.        FIRST:  Doppler deals with fuel temperature, and this will be the first parameter to change.                                                                                        (1.0)                    ;
Power increase as recire flow is increased.
: b.        Second: Moderator temperature coefficient begins adding negative reactivity as soon as sufficient heat is transferred to the coolant to raise coolant temperature.                                                                      (1.0)
The increase in power is due W/
: c.        Third:  Void coefficient will have little or no effect until saturation temperature is reached.                                                                                (1.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VIII, PP. 26 and 27 ANSWER            1.07                  (1.00)
The period during power increase is governed by how quickly the neutron                                                                              :
population can increase. [0.5]                The same holds true on a power decrease,                                                              J however, the neutron population is dominated by the longest lived delayed                                                                            i neutron precursor. [0.5] This decays with -80 sec. period.                                                                  (1.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VI, P. 16 ANSWER            1.08                  (2.00)
: a.      As.the reactor operates at power, Xenon builds in to equilibrium [0.5],
adding negative ' reactivity, causing power to decrease (0.5].                                                      (1.0)
: b.        In 40-50 hours [0.5] when equilibrium Xenon is reached [0.5].                                                      (1.0) l i
_-    .. --        -          . - , , ,          , - .    . . _  m... _ _ . _ . , , _      . _ . ,  . . . - _ _ . _ _ . - ,      . - - . _ - - -
: 1. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                                           PAGE   23 THERMODINAMICS. HEAT TRANS m AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                           -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Chapter V, P 9 of 10 ANSWER                         1.09             (1.50)       Qh q,                       4   ,
Power increase as recire flow is increased. The increase in power is due W/                         .
to the addition of positive reactivity as voids are swept away by the increase in recirculation flow ( W e As power increases, fuel temperature increases, inserting negative reactivity due to doppler broadening (0.5) f -
to the addition of positive reactivity as voids are swept away by the increase in recirculation flow ( W e As power increases, fuel temperature increases, inserting negative reactivity due to doppler broadening (0.5) f -
As this new heat is transferred to t                         coolant, more void formation occurs, thus more negative reactivity                             Therefore, boiling boundary is back to its original location, approximate                                                           (1.5)
As this new heat is transferred to t coolant, more void formation occurs, thus more negative reactivity Therefore, boiling boundary is back to its original location, approximate (1.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. 8, PP. 28-30 ANSWER                         1.10             (1.50)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch.
: a.             DECREASE                                                                     (0.5)
8, PP. 28-30 ANSWER 1.10 (1.50) a.
: b.             There is an increased percentage of fissioning from Pu 239 i                         which has a smaller delayed neutron fraction than U 238 and U 235.                                                                       (1.0)
DECREASE (0.5) b.
REFERENCE Raactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VII, P. 4 ANSWE                            1 11            (1.50)                                       /
There is an increased percentage of fissioning from Pu 239 i
: a. J:%. aa,er a w ay~ s~rk ass"a,                                             a (0.5)
which has a smaller delayed neutron fraction than U 238 and U 235.
: b.             MAPRAT = APLHGR/MAPLHGR Limit -or- APLHGR (actual)/MAPLHGR fd                       6                       (LCO max)         (1.0) hn+4a tim 7)
(1.0)
REFERENCE j
REFERENCE Raactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VII, P. 4 (1.50)
General Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 9 P. 7Pe%
/
                        /%9///7 h rhe co psares' m/cssA9riha << sed ro /WMf)-
ANSWE 1 11
: a. J:%. aa,er a w ay~ s~rk ass"a, a
(0.5) b.
MAPRAT = APLHGR/MAPLHGR Limit -or-APLHGR (actual)/MAPLHGR fd 6
(LCO max)
(1.0) hn+4a tim 7)
REFERENCE General Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, j
Ch. 9 P. 7Pe%
/%9///7 h rhe co psares' m/cssA9riha << sed ro /WMf)-
utere rse Mse denu/ Ah m de aceeoW i
utere rse Mse denu/ Ah m de aceeoW i
: 1. *PRIRQIP MR OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                                     PAGE   24 TWRMODYNAMICS. M AT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                 -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
 
ANSWER           1.12         (1.00)
1.
: b.                                                                                     (1.0)
*PRIRQIP MR OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P. 116 ANSWER           1.13         (1.00)
PAGE 24 TWRMODYNAMICS. M AT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2
: b.                                                                                     (1.0)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P. 123 ANSWER           1.14         (1.00)
ANSWER 1.12 (1.00) b.
(62.4 lbm)     (55 ft - O ft)                                           2 P     = ---------- x --------------           OR             1 ft H O = 0.4335 lbf/in 2             3                 2 2       --
(1.0)
2 (ft )       (144 in /ft )
REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P.
116 ANSWER 1.13 (1.00) b.
(1.0)
REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P.
123 ANSWER 1.14 (1.00)
(62.4 lbm)
(55 ft - O ft) 2 P
= ---------- x --------------
OR 1 ft H O = 0.4335 lbf/in 2
2 3
2 2
(ft )
(144 in /ft )
55 ft x 0.4335 = 23.8 psig 2
55 ft x 0.4335 = 23.8 psig 2
P     = 23.8 lbm/in (psig)                                                             (1.0) 2 REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P. 20 ANSWER           1.15         (1.50)
P
: a.         INCREASES
= 23.8 lbm/in (psig)
: b.         DECREASES
(1.0) 2 REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P. 20 ANSWER 1.15 (1.50) a.
: c.         INCREASES   .                                              [3 9 0.5 each]   (2.0) 4 REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 9, PP. 93-96
INCREASES b.
: 1. '' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.                           PAGE 25 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2                           -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
DECREASES c.
h                      !
INCREASES
ll}$%' CA ANSWER       1.16         (3,50                             /fdS                   l Re    or  ower fR*0 M''T'*"h FW temp    Fu) he An e
[3 9 0.5 each]
                            ~
(2.0) 4 REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch.
(* altup)'           - '-
9, PP. 93-96
FW flow                           --
: 1. '' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.
RPV pressure RPV level                                           [any 4 9 0.5 each] (2.0)
PAGE 25 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2
: b. 1. High flow high power                                                 (0.5)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
: 2. High flow high power, due to increased inlet subcooling from increased FW flow.                                                   (1.0)
ll}$%' A h
C ANSWER 1.16 (3,50
/fdS fR*0 M''T'*"h, Re or ower he An e (* altup)'
FW temp Fu)
FW flow
~
RPV pressure RPV level
[any 4 9 0.5 each]
(2.0) b.
1.
High flow high power (0.5) 2.
High flow high power, due to increased inlet subcooling from increased FW flow.
(1.0)
REFERENCE Gsneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, PP. 92-97 P
REFERENCE Gsneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, PP. 92-97 P
l l
  *          ~
: 2.
: 2.
* PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                                 PAGE         26
* PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 26
          ' ANSWERS -- WNP-2                               -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
~
l ANSWER           2.01       ( .50)
' ANSWERS -- WNP-2
Ball check valves                                                                           (0.5)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, CRDH, P. 23, Figure 11 ANSWER           2.02       (2.50)
l ANSWER 2.01
: a. Shifts the recirc pumps to slow.                                                     (0.5)              f b.[Fluxshapesattheendofcyclearesuchthatthe)rodscannot y'j $r#18g/                       . st insert sufficient reactivity during the first few feet of (1.0)
(.50)
                , rod travel on a scram due to a turbine trip. first stage When + s turbine steam flow             < 142 psi                           4[
Ball check valves (0.5)
[ c.       pressudr (either answer accep WOf*                   # 7Kved/MRC                     (0,5) f d.       Key lock switch on back panels p609 and p611.                                       (0.25) l
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, CRDH, P. 23, Figure 11 ANSWER 2.02 (2.50)
: e.     (4) 2 out of 4                                                                     (0.25)
(0.5) f a.
See 0 AfMCb REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, Reactor Recire, P. 31 ANSWER           2.03       (2.50)
Shifts the recirc pumps to slow.
: a. 1 (d) 2 (a) 3 (e) 4 (g) 5 (c) 6 (f) 7 (b)                                             [7 at 0.2 each]                   (1.4)
y'j $r#18g/
: b. 1. C and D                                                                         (0.2)
b.[Fluxshapesattheendofcyclearesuchthatthe)rodscannot st insert sufficient reactivity during the first few feet of
: 2. A or C AND B or D                                                               (0.5)
, rod travel on a scram due to a turbine trip.
: 3. D                                                                               (0,1)
4[
: 4. B                                                                               (0.1)
(1.0)
                >5. A and B                                                                         (0.2)
When + s turbine steam flow
L Y = = , =- Q= /
< 142 psi first stage
C,s_ ff REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, (NSSSS) PP.
[ c.
3 and 15 ha        ,_f,ff
pressudr (either answer accep WOf*
                                                                                                /
# 7Kved/MRC (0,5) f d.
                                                                                                  )                          -
Key lock switch on back panels p609 and p611.
(0.25) l e.
(4) 2 out of 4 (0.25)
See 0 AfMCb REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, Reactor Recire, P. 31 ANSWER 2.03 (2.50) a.
1 (d) 2 (a) 3 (e) 4 (g) 5 (c) 6 (f) 7 (b)
[7 at 0.2 each]
(1.4) b.
1.
C and D (0.2) 2.
A or C AND B or D (0.5) 3.
D (0,1) 4.
B (0.1)
>5.
A and B (0.2)
L Y = =, =- Q= /
C,s_ ff ha
,_f,ff
)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, (NSSSS) PP.
3 and 15
/
1
1
: 2. ' PLM'T DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                                   PAGE                         27
: 2. ' PLM'T DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 27
  " ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                       -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
" ANSWERS -- WNP-2
ANSWER           2.04           (1.00)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
: a. 1. One gpm
ANSWER 2.04 (1.00) a.
: 2.     One Hour                                                                       (1.0)
1.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Leak Detection System, PP. 2, 4 and 5 ANSWER           2.05           (2.00)
One gpm 2.
: n.                                gpm)                                                         (0.5)
One Hour (1.0)
Equipment Floor drain sump  sump [25[5 gpm)                                                 (0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Leak Detection System, PP. 2, 4 and 5 ANSWER 2.05 (2.00) gpm)
: b. . Pump out timer                                                                           (0.5)
(0.5)
Sump fill timer                                                                         (0,5)
Equipment sump [25[5 gpm) n.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Leak Detection System, PP. 2, 4 and 5 ANSWER             2.06           (1.75)
(0.5)
: a. 1. RWCU non-regenerative heat exchangers
Floor drain sump ~
: 2. RWCU pump coolers
(0.5) b.
: 3. Recire pump jacket cooler                                 [3 9 0.25 each] (0.75)
. Pump out timer Sump fill timer (0,5)
: b. 1. Surge tank high level slarm.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Leak Detection System, PP. 2, 4 and 5 ANSWER 2.06 (1.75) a.
: 2. Closed cooling water high radiation alarm.                 [2 9 0.25 each] (0.5)
1.
: c. Surge tank vent valve' closes.                                                             (0.5) g,,fgee er             re")
RWCU non-regenerative heat exchangers 2.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, RCCW, PP. 19 and 21 ANSWER           2.07           ( .50)
RWCU pump coolers 3.
HPCS water injection is a large thermal shock on the vessel nozzle cnd sparger./g             r ;-                 ,x-                                               (0.5)
Recire pump jacket cooler
[ d~ p cs -see5                         e i c.    -e r =7   /~~<'   = 4 H ~-r       w-s ~ v.~o                         f n
[3 9 0.25 each] (0.75) b.
                                                                        "#"~"'                                               "
1.
REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training HPCS, Pi 12, 2                                             d^''                                      '
Surge tank high level slarm.
we  s
2.
  -r.._-,.-~ r a , ~ -7 e -s,.s-sis ,
Closed cooling water high radiation alarm.
  . p ,. -z
[2 9 0.25 each]
                    .es e i 5 7n     sue   s                       M :' - r - n
(0.5)
  . W"#*       * , fr s re -* I fa ,, , nowd /t'C/f. ,s".3f
Surge tank vent valve' closes.
(0.5) c.
re")
g,,fgee er REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, RCCW, PP. 19 and 21 ANSWER 2.07
(.50)
HPCS water injection is a large thermal shock on the vessel nozzle (0.5) cnd sparger./g r ;-
,x-
[ d~ p cs -see5
-e r =7
/~~<'
= 4 H ~-r w-s ~ v.~o f e i c.
"#"~"'
REFERENCE n
d^''
WNP-2, System Training HPCS, Pi 12, 2
-r.._-,.-~
r a, ~ -7 e -s,.s-sis,
we s M :' - r - n
. p,.
-z
.es e i 5 7n sue s
. W"#*
*, fr s re -* I fa,,, nowd /t'C/f.,s".3f
: 2. -PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 28
. ANSWERS -- WNP-2
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
ANSWER 2.08 (2.00) a.
RCIC would not initiate because of the interlock between RCIC V-68 and RCIC V-45 (1.0) b.
RCIC would trip on high exhaust line back pressure.
(1.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training RCIC, PP. 21 and 25 e d, 1 q. rti, C US b ffl')
t ANSWER 2,09 (2.00)
' dy dy rv, or 2
g Vce 7mr r s c, ~ <* e '
l 7,eeu, }~,3,-
pp 3Q h.;3 l
I m
~
c.-ce c
: e..,,
gyp? -
b o
c - c., r a, -
:uot :~o T :,,a }_-
;;g
-7<-7 n,,,,m o sw r see.
&-h~p'f~~ph_~j p
1 I
I aus aus aus I
soi e2s en vacuum sneAxen l
N- -
fl stA N-5 N
th)yf pg TYMCAL OF sEVEN ADS VALVES
[9.1 credit for cach iter merked en :ttachcd th:tch]
~
: 12. 0 P
'~
r, REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training ADS, PP. 3, 7 and Figure 5 i
3


  -  2. -PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                                                                PAGE                    28
2.
    . ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                          -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 29
ANSWER        2.08          (2.00)
' ANSWERS -- WNP-2
: a. RCIC would not initiate because of the interlock between RCIC V-68 and RCIC V-45                                                                                                      (1.0)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
: b. RCIC would trip on high exhaust line back pressure.                                                                (1.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training RCIC, PP. 21 and 25 e d,        1 q . rti,                -
C US b ffl' )
t                      '    ---
ANSWER        2,09          (2.00)              ' dy          '
dy                          rv, or
                                                                    -      g    .,      -                  2 Vce      7mr    r s c, ~ <* e '        l 7,eeu, }~,3 ,-                            pp 3Q
          ~      -    c.-ce    c    , ,.            I
: e. . , ,        m                      h.;3
* l c - c., r a, -
          -7<-7          n ,, , ,m gyp?          :,,a
                                                                              - :uot :~o      b o
o sw r see .                                            T
                                                                              }_-              ;;g
                                                        &-h~p'f~~ph_~j                          p 1          I        I
                                                      ;          aus        aus      aus
                                                      ;          soi        e2s      en                vacuum    I sneAxen    l
                                            ,                                                                N-  -
N        fl pg 5 stA                                                          N-th)yf                                            --
TYMCAL OF sEVEN ADS VALVES
[9.1 credit for cach iter merked en :ttachcd th:tch]                                              *
                                                                                                                          ~
                                                                                                                          '~
: 12. 0 P                  '
r,  l REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training ADS, PP. 3, 7 and Figure 5                                                                                                  l i
3 l
l 1
 
l
: 2. PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                                     PAGE           29 1
    ' ANSWERS -- WNP-2                             -86/08/11-HANEK, J.                                                       !
l l
l l
yRlufS E ANSWER           2.10       (3.00)                                   NA2[7y                                              i
yRlufS E NA2[7y i
: o. Reacim pc :r is ::reater then4% vor Aritn s [C.20] w cannet                                     /f4 Lo determined [0.25-](AND reactor cannot be shutdown [0.$f before suppression pool temperature reaches 110 F [0 9' .))                                     (1.0)
ANSWER 2.10 (3.00) 4 o.
: b.     1. Isolates cleanup system outboard isolation valve.
Reacim pc :r is ::reater then4% vor Aritn s [C.20] w cannet
: 2. Starts "A" injection pump.
/f Lo determined [0.25-](AND reactor cannot be shutdown [0.$f before suppression pool temperature reaches 110 F [0 9'.))
: 3. Fires both "A" and "B" squib valves.
(1.0) b.
: 4. Opens both pump suction valves.                             [4 @ 0.5 each]               (2.0)
1.
FERENCE                        '~ ~'%                      9 j,ff ftl9d N h Aff it h )
Isolates cleanup system outboard isolation valve.
Systems Training SLC, PP. 8 and 16 WNP-2, A w .a s u or7 _                                /      S p n '
2.
Starts "A" injection pump.
3.
Fires both "A" and "B" squib valves.
4.
Opens both pump suction valves.
[4 @ 0.5 each]
(2.0) 9 j,ff ftl9d N h Aff it h
'~ ~'%
)
FERENCE S p n '
* n /-
* n /-
ANSWER           2.11       (3.25)
Systems Training SLC, PP. 8 and 16 WNP-2, A w.a s u or7 _
: o.       1. Preheaters
/
: 2. Catalytic recombiner
ANSWER 2.11 (3.25) o.
: 3. Off-gas condenser
1.
: 4. Water separator
Preheaters 2.
: 5. Hydrogen analyzer                                                                           '''"" ,'
Catalytic recombiner 3.
: 6. 10 mint.te holdup                                             .      ; 7e- er
Off-gas condenser 4.
: 7. Cooler condensers              c,-e    e-c                ,,c ,.,.,,
Water separator 5.
ur-                          )
Hydrogen analyzer e r 6.
: 8. Moisture separator              '~'  a',.;. '.'''yg,f,',0,
10 mint.te holdup
                                                                      ,, ,,, wer s e r         sw"'''"]
; 7e-a',.;. '''yg,f,',0,
: 9. Prefilter W     m cal   ::1i;.; , = % ,e
,,c,.,.,,
        /0 fl.     Desiccant dryers         '""L~-
e-c ur-
                                            ~" ^ " #
)
        // 14.     Gas coolers f u 1-3 . Charcoal adsorbers                                         a       .N4 14 . After filter                 7: r - d' '           [Tt 9 0.-t5 each]               (2.1) b .jj Valves in the off-gas system [++fr] are supplied with air from                                                     ;
7.
the CAS system for stem sealing               F- This prevents radioactive gasses from escaping from f)1e of - as system [                   ]. .f/ d s/;.;             (1.15)             .
Cooler condensers c,-e
REFERENCE Lt SeR tb (,4vM c$o     fW fyjfe-n[c,;)}
,,, wer s e r sw"'''"]
                                                                                                                                \
8.
WNP-2, Systems Training Off-gas Processing, PP. 3-6 and 29                                                               i hM       d- dV Slff       d f f/ 'l ''f' Vf''                                                              '
Moisture separator
g/g used ra "we-ap " rAr sysen                     6a AMeke"N b/J<c~<#
'~'
: 2. ' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS                       PAGE   33
9.
        , ANSWERS -- WNP-2                           -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
Prefilter W
ANSWER           2.12     (3.00)
m cal
: 1. Wet pipe:     normally pressurized with water, elevated temperature melts the fusible link in the sprinkler head to start flow.
::1i;.;
: 2. Dry pipe / pre-action:   ['ressurizedwithairbetweenthedelugevalve p
, = %,e
When a potential fire is andsprinklerhead)tsdareaasignalissent sensed in the protec to open the deluge valve. Elevated temperature in the protected area will melt the fusible link to start flow.
/0 fl.
: 3. Deluge Spray:     Dry pipe with open spray nozzles. When a fire is sensed in the protected area it will send a signal to open the deluge valve to immediately start flow to the fire.
Desiccant dryers
'""L~-
~" ^ " #
// 14.
Gas coolers f u 1-3.
Charcoal adsorbers a
.N4 14.
After filter 7: r - d' '
[Tt 9 0.-t5 each]
(2.1) b.jj Valves in the off-gas system [++fr] are supplied with air from the CAS system for stem sealing F-This prevents radioactive gasses from escaping from f)1e of - as system [
].
.f/ d s/;.;
(1.15)
\\
Lt SeR tb (,4vM c$o fW fyjfe-n[c,;)}
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Off-gas Processing, PP. 3-6 and 29 i
hM d-dV Slff d f f/ 'l ''f' Vf''
g/g used ra "we-ap " rAr sysen 6a AMeke"N b/J<c~<#
 
2.
' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 33
, ANSWERS -- WNP-2
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
ANSWER 2.12 (3.00) 1.
Wet pipe:
normally pressurized with water, elevated temperature melts the fusible link in the sprinkler head to start flow.
['ressurizedwithairbetweenthedelugevalve 2.
Dry pipe / pre-action:
p andsprinklerhead)tsdareaasignalissent When a potential fire is sensed in the protec to open the deluge valve.
Elevated temperature in the protected area will melt the fusible link to start flow.
3.
Deluge Spray:
Dry pipe with open spray nozzles.
When a fire is sensed in the protected area it will send a signal to open the deluge valve to immediately start flow to the fire.
[0.25 for each correct name]
[0.25 for each correct name]
[0.25 for each correct description]
[0.25 for each correct description]
[0.5 for each correct system action]       (3.0)
[0.5 for each correct system action]
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Fire Protection System, PP. 11-14 ANSWER           2.13     ( .50)
(3.0)
FALSE                                                                           (0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Fire Protection System, PP. 11-14 ANSWER 2.13
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training DC Power System, P. 3 ANSWER           2.14       ( .50)
(.50)
TRUE                                                                           (g,5)
FALSE (0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training DC Power System, P. 3 ANSWER 2.14
(.50)
TRUE (g,5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Main Generator, P. 23 I
REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Main Generator, P. 23 I
: 3. ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                                                           PAGE       31
: 3. ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 31
    ' ANSWERS -- WNP-2                             -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
' ANSWERS -- WNP-2
ANSWER       3.01         (2.75)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
: c. The circuit is designed to reduce the vessel inventory setpoint to a value which is sufficient to maintain reactor water level b#ow the level 8 trip setpoint following a scram.                                         (0.75)
ANSWER 3.01 (2.75) c.
: b.                                                                                                            (0.5) i      c.
The circuit is designed to reduce the vessel inventory setpoint to a value which is sufficient to maintain reactor water level b#ow the level 8 trip setpoint following a scram.
Scram relays (or AX and AY relays.) lement to single element.
(0.75)
: 1. Transfers FWLC system from 3 e                                                                       (0.5)
(0.5)
: 2. Lowers the vessel level setpoint to + 18 inches ( M                                                 (0.5)
Scram relays (or AX and AY relays.) lement to single element.
: d. The level setpoint will "rampup" to the value shown on the master (0.5) controller over a .two   minute   period.)
b.
1.
Transfers FWLC system from 3 e (0.5) i c.
2.
Lowers the vessel level setpoint to + 18 inches ( M (0.5) d.
The level setpoint will "rampup" to the value shown on the master (0.5) controller over a.two minute period.)
Mik/C (sec m McAnter REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Feedwater Level Control, P. 6
Mik/C (sec m McAnter REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Feedwater Level Control, P. 6
                #5       Z2 / /2tu.cbr S&rm _ f / cry ANSWER       3.02         (1.75)
#5 Z2 / /2tu.cbr S&rm _ f / cry ANSWER 3.02 (1.75)
: c.                                             Transient                                    Final
Transient Final c.
: 1. Reactor vessel level                 DECREASE                             DECREASE
1.
: 2. Feedwater flow                       DECREASE                                       SAME
Reactor vessel level DECREASE DECREASE 2.
: 3. Total indicated steam flow           DECREASE                             DECREASE
Feedwater flow DECREASE SAME 3.
[6 0 0.25 each]                             (1.5)
Total indicated steam flow DECREASE DECREASE
: b. No.                                                                                                   (0.25)
[6 0 0.25 each]
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Feedwater Level Control, P. 15 ANSWER       3.03         (2.00)                                                                                                   l l
(1.5) b.
: a. 1. Droop is used when operating in parallel with other                                                                   l power sources.                                                                                       (0.5)
No.
: 2. ISO is used when suppling an isolated bus.                                                           (0.5)             l
(0.25)
: b. ISO                                                                                                   (0.25)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Feedwater Level Control, P. 15 ANSWER 3.03 (2.00) a.
: c. DROOP: (ihs-erts a 5% ispeed cYUop Izvie ? te-fu1 M a d-OR
1.
                  , TEtie57he' iltf=loiid !FpWdietting=SE)fo compensate                                                               j for droop in speed created by an increase in load.                                           (0.75)
Droop is used when operating in parallel with other power sources.
                                        - cA -   '
(0.5) 2.
e    A r un -    o/(,    to fi ~-Q 74 G e' f      sl0 7/</ N'/ 4 (n-e"''^~
ISO is used when suppling an isolated bus.
REFERENCE                                                                         , , _                ,        r,.
(0.5) l b.
WNP-2, Systems Training Diesel Generators, P. 64                         /                         ,  ,, , ,7   ,,p n,     7ia         .
ISO (0.25) c.
                                                                                                                / e ** $
DROOP: (ihs-erts a 5% ispeed cYUop Izvie ? te-fu1 M a d-OR
 
, TEtie57he' iltf=loiid !FpWdietting=SE)fo compensate j
  *3.
for droop in speed created by an increase in load.
      ~
(0.75)
          ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE     32
- cA -
    .' ANSWERS -- WNP-2                             -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
sl0 7/</ N'/ 4 (n-e"''^~
f ANSWER           3.04         (2.50)
to fi ~-Q 74 G e' f e
: a.       SRM detector not fully inserted AND SRM count rate < 100 CPS                                                           (0.75)
A r un -
: b.       Bypassed when:
o/(,
Mso :   SCM > /wc/s                                                           ,
REFERENCE r,.
: 1. ALL IRM range switches are on Range 3 or above.                                     .5)
WNP-2, Systems Training Diesel Generators, P. 64
: 2. SRM channel is bypassed.
/
3  Mode switch is in run                            ,
,,,,7,,p n,
                                                                                # * > f'    /     (d.
7ia
( .   )
/ e ** $
                                                                  ,G /r/ 6/
* 3.
l      c. 'Nb         SA M >. /80 4 N                   Ay                               (/f (0.25)
' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 32
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training SRM's, P. 27 ANSWER           3.05         (2.75)
~
I# ^ #"''''  "' * '''
.' ANSWERS -- WNP-2
: c. Area 2 - Ionization Area 3 - Proportional Area 5 - Geiger Mueller (GM) b.
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
Area 6 - Continuous Discharge (a- <<~~r
f ANSWER 3.04 (2.50) a.
: 1. SRM - Area 2 e ~''""]4     9 0. 25 each] (1.0)
SRM detector not fully inserted AND SRM count rate < 100 CPS (0.75) b.
: 2. IRM - Area 2                                                   ,j ffA , I -
Bypassed when:
: 3. Fuel load dunking chamber - Area 3           e'r                                                                       ?, ~, , ,,"' ' '' " ' V
Mso :
: 4. ARM's - Area 5
SCM > /wc/s 1.
: 5. Main steam line rad monitors - Area 2
ALL IRM range switches are on Range 3 or above.
: 6. Portable frisker station - Area 5
.5) 2.
: 7. Dose rate setting portable instrument - Area 2
SRM channel is bypassed.
(d. )
/
(
(/f (0.25) 3 Mode switch is in run l
: c. 'Nb SA M >. /80 4 N Ay
,G /r/ 6/
# * > f' REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training SRM's, P. 27 ANSWER 3.05 (2.75) c.
Area 2 - Ionization I# ^
Area 3 - Proportional Area 5 - Geiger Mueller (GM)
Area 6 - Continuous Discharge (a- <<~~r e ~''""]4 9 0. 25 each] (1.0) b.
1.
SRM - Area 2 2.
IRM - Area 2 3-
,j ffA, I -
3.
Fuel load dunking chamber - Area 3 e'r - ?, ~,,,,"' ' '' " ' V 4.
ARM's - Area 5 5.
Main steam line rad monitors - Area 2 6.
Portable frisker station - Area 5 7.
Dose rate setting portable instrument - Area 2
[7 9 0.25 each](1.75)
[7 9 0.25 each](1.75)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, SRM's, P. 7 and Figure 4, ARM's P. 2, Process Effluent Radiation Monitoring System, P. 4 ANSWER           3.06           (1.00)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, SRM's, P. 7 and Figure 4, ARM's P. 2, Process Effluent Radiation Monitoring System, P. 4 ANSWER 3.06 (1.00) a.
: a. 1. 5% 0 ' 3 Y W V *' V
1.
: 2. 12%                                                     [2 9 0.5 each]         (1.0) i l
5% 0 ' 3 Y W V *' V 2.
12%
[2 9 0.5 each]
(1.0) i l
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
                                                                    #.  //
//
WNP-2,. Systems         Training APRM's, P. L9 ) M'8M s-e c <no n w J           .
WNP-2,. Systems Training APRM's, P. L9 ) M'8M 7un,u e.
7un,u e.
s-e c <no n w J
 
* 3.
*3.     ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                               PAGE     33
' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 33
    ' ANSWERS -- WNP-2                           -86/08/11-HANEK   J.
' ANSWERS -- WNP-2
ANSWER         3.07       (2.25)
-86/08/11-HANEK J.
: a.     1. >10% difference between comparators
ANSWER 3.07 (2.25) a.
: 2. Upscale trip 108%
1.
: 3. Mode switch not in operate
>10% difference between comparators 2.
: 4. Module in the flow unit is removed               [4 at 0.25 each]     (1.0) b       Rod block                                                             (0.25)
Upscale trip 108%
If a flow unit is bypassed the flow signal to the comparator is hh c. automatically bypassed to the next unit. (If A is bypassed, then i
3.
the signal from flow Unit C would be compared with flow Unit B)           (1.0)
Mode switch not in operate 4.
Module in the flow unit is removed
[4 at 0.25 each]
(1.0) b Rod block (0.25) hh c.
If a flow unit is bypassed the flow signal to the comparator is automatically bypassed to the next unit. (If A is bypassed, then i
the signal from flow Unit C would be compared with flow Unit B)
(1.0)
(+ 1 S y & & c c-0 @ ~ d ~ ~ ~ ~ro)
(+ 1 S y & & c c-0 @ ~ d ~ ~ ~ ~ro)
REFERENCE
REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training APRM's, PP. 10 and 11
                                                                      '" 'd '' ' " M#
'd '' ' " M#
WNP-2, System Training APRM's, PP. 10 and 11                           m re urm e r ANSWER         3.08       (2.50)
r m re urm e ANSWER 3.08 (2.50) a.
: a. To change gain of averaging amplifier so that the RBM output (averaging amplifier output) will be equal to or greater than reference APRM output.                                                     (0.5)
To change gain of averaging amplifier so that the RBM output (averaging amplifier output) will be equal to or greater than reference APRM output.
: b.     1. Local power may be significantly lower than core average power.                                                        (0.5)
(0.5) b.
: 2. Several of the highesc reading LPRM's that normally input to a RBM channel might be bypassed.                             (0.5)
1.
: c. RBM A - APRM C Normal APRM E Alternate RBM B - APRM D Normal APRM F Alternate                         [4 0 0.25 each)         (1.0)
Local power may be significantly lower than core (0.5) average power.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training REM System, PP. 8, 9 and 31 ANSWER         3.09         (2.00)
2.
: a.     The function of the valves is to shut-off flow in the event of a leak or line rupture downstream of the valve.                       (0.5) hhb.-~La.u         ouu ~ instrument lines (with normally no flow conditions)                                                               (0.5)
Several of the highesc reading LPRM's that normally input to a RBM channel might be bypassed.
: c.      To equalize pressure on both sides of the valve after an actuation thus allowing spring pressure to reopen the valve.             (0.5)
(0.5) c.
: d.     Board S in the control room.                                             (0.5)
RBM A - APRM C Normal APRM E Alternate RBM B - APRM D Normal APRM F Alternate
[4 0 0.25 each)
(1.0)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training REM System, PP. 8, 9 and 31 ANSWER 3.09 (2.00) a.
The function of the valves is to shut-off flow in the event of a leak or line rupture downstream of the valve.
(0.5) hhb.-~La.u
~ instrument lines (with normally no flow ouu conditions)
(0.5)
To equalize pressure on both sides of the valve after an c.
actuation thus allowing spring pressure to reopen the valve.
(0.5) d.
Board S in the control room.
(0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Nuclear Boiler Instrument, PP. 48 and 49
REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Nuclear Boiler Instrument, PP. 48 and 49
: 3.       INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS                                                           PAGE     34       l l
 
  . ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                     -86/08/11-HANEK, J.                                     j ANSWER           3.10   ,
3.
(1.50)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 34
: n.       No.                                                                                 (0.25)
. ANSWERS -- WNP-2
The wide range indicator is calibrated with no jet pump flow so at 100% power it will read 15-20" low due to the draw down effect of the jet pumps.                                                   (0.5)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
: b.      No.                                                                                  (0.25)
j ANSWER 3.10 (1.50) n.
TAF is -161 inches, lower end of wide range level isntrument is -150 inches.                                                                       (0.5)
No.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Nuclear Boiler Instrumentation, PP. 17, 58, and 59 fy ANSWER           3.11       (2.00)     -7/it a A p e
(0.25)
* 7 gg f je . 4 moffARTCo%'v          AUT["
The wide range indicator is calibrated with no jet pump flow so at 100% power it will read 15-20" low due to the draw down effect of the jet pumps.
r- / / fb"5
(0.5)
                                                              -< z v ' - >>.
(0.25) b.
ul .       ?ransf ers boi,li luv_r_ lov centroller_% - enterstrie                                     -
No.
                  -to manual. " -                                                                 00-5F#
TAF is -161 inches, lower end of wide range level isntrument is -150 inches.
: 2. Locks the flow control valves.                                   6 I)C ' . '( E 5) ^ >5
(0.5)
: 3. Locks the recirc pump discharge valves.                         (_ r) ( - ,f e d P j:
REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Nuclear Boiler Instrumentation, PP. 17, 58, and 59 fy offARTCo%'v AUT[" fb"5 ANSWER 3.11 (2.00)
The basis for these automatic actions is to allow rapid                                -
-7/it a A p e
* 7 r- / /
gg f je. 4 m -< z v ' -
ul.
?ransf ers boi,li luv_r_ lov centroller_% - enterstrie
-to manual. " -
00-5F#
2.
Locks the flow control valves.
6 I)C '. '( E 5) ^ >5 3.
Locks the recirc pump discharge valves.
(_ r) ( -,f e d P j:
b.
b.
vessel depressurization in the event of a break in the                               7 / #) ,
The basis for these automatic actions is to allow rapid vessel depressurization in the event of a break in the 7 / #),
recirculation system piping.                                                         -t0-STr
recirculation system piping.
                      /2dfdA&M Y .' 7       , yp,) .s 3.syJ /en NO,b [^)
-t0-STr
                                                              /d M '/- {& C       N   f JJ
/2dfdA&M Y.' 7
                        . m        . e e nn,          h e s A , , ,n           7,,,,,,-,.,,,,n         r ANSWER           3.12         (2.00)               -
, yp,).s syJ /en NO,b [^)
                                                                                                  ,g a.1. Automatic TIP withdrawal.
/d M '/- {& C N
f JJ h e s A,,,n 7,,,,,,-,.,,,,n r
m
: 3.. e e nn, ANSWER 3.12 (2.00)
,g a.1. Automatic TIP withdrawal.
a.2. TIP ball valve closes.
a.2. TIP ball valve closes.
b.1. In-Shield light lit.           I b.2. Valve open light lit               y. ep                                   (4 @ 0.5 ea.)
b.1.
Vy ,,n , Q a.     ,e z. win ,,,,,cr REFERENCE                                                               '
In-Shield light lit.
WNP-2, Systems Training TIPS PP 11, 13, and 14.                             -
I b.2. Valve open light lit
: y. ep (4 @ 0.5 ea.)
V,,n, Q a.
y
,e z. win
,,,,,cr REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training TIPS PP 11, 13, and 14.
9
9


d'.     ' PRO ('EDURES - NORMAL. ABNCRMAL. EMERGENCY AND                                                                 PAGE     35
d'.
            , RADIOLOGICAL cot!IRQL 4
' PRO ('EDURES - NORMAL. ABNCRMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 35
* ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                   -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
, RADIOLOGICAL cot!IRQL 4
ANSWER                 4.01     -
* ANSWERS -- WNP-2
(1.00)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
TWO independent indications confirm misoperation in automatic mode or Edequate core cooling is assured.                                                                                         (1.0).
ANSWER 4.01 (1.00)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.2.1, Standing Orders ANSWER                 4.02           ( .50)
TWO independent indications confirm misoperation in automatic mode or Edequate core cooling is assured.
Leave the controlled area and notify the HP/ chemistry department.                                                         (0.5)
(1.0).
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.11.3, P. 8 ANSWER                 4.03           (1.00)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.2.1, Standing Orders ANSWER 4.02
When it is necessary to prevent injury to personnel or damage to the plant.                                                                                                                 (1.0)
(.50)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.2.3, P. 2 ANSWER                   4.04           ( .50)
Leave the controlled area and notify the HP/ chemistry department.
Shutdown the pump within one minute.                                                                                     (0.5)
(0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 2.2.1, P. 4 ANSWER                 4.05           (1.50)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.11.3, P. 8 ANSWER 4.03 (1.00)
: a.             Close the valve to prevent reverse rotation of the pump.                   It is
When it is necessary to prevent injury to personnel or damage to the plant.
                                                                                                                                  '(1.0)
(1.0)
                                                                                                  ~
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.2.3, P. 2 ANSWER 4.04
reopened to maintain the idle loop temperature.
(.50)
: b.             After 5 minutes.     ,
Shutdown the pump within one minute.
(0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 2.2.1, P. 4 ANSWER 4.05 (1.50) a.
Close the valve to prevent reverse rotation of the pump.
It is reopened to maintain the idle loop temperature.
~
'(1.0) b.
After 5 minutes.
(0.5)
(0.5)


d'.
d'.
* PROCEDURES - NORMAL . ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND                                   PAGE     36
* PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 36
          ,. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL AdSWERS -- WNP-2                               -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
,. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL l
l REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 2.2.1, P. 4 ANSWER           4.06     (2.00)
AdSWERS -- WNP-2
: a.      By attempting to pull each control rod withdrawn to Position 48 to the overtravel position.       A valid coupling check requires a continuous withdraw signal be maintained long enough to observe drive stall flow at Position 48.                                                 (1.5)
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
: b.       Rod overtravel alarm.                                                             (0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 2.2.1, P. 4 ANSWER 4.06 (2.00)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Cold Startup Procedure 3.1.2, P. 6 ANSWER           4.07     ( .50)
By attempting to pull each control rod withdrawn to Position 48 a.
FALSE REFERENCE WNP-2, Plant Shutdown Procedure 3.2.1, P. 5 ANSWER           4.08       (2.00)                                                                 ;
to the overtravel position.
: a.     1. 80 inches
A valid coupling check requires a continuous withdraw signal be maintained long enough to observe drive stall flow at Position 48.
: 2. metal
(1.5) b.
: 3. hour                                                   [3 0   0.5 each]     (1.5)
Rod overtravel alarm.
: b.     To insure natural circulation core cooling capability.                           (0.5)
(0.5)
,                                                                                                      l REFERENCE WNP-2, Normal Shutdown to Cold Shutdown Procedure 3.2.1, P. 11 ANSWER           4.09         (2.00)                                                               l
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Cold Startup Procedure 3.1.2, P. 6 ANSWER 4.07
: a.     1. Reactor feedwater pressure 3ess than 420 psig OR
(.50)
: 2. Reactornfeedwater temperature is less than 340 F.
FALSE REFERENCE WNP-2, Plant Shutdown Procedure 3.2.1, P.
: 3. RWCU flow is returned to the RPV and allowed to repressure the feedwater piping.                                   [3 0 0.5 each]       (1.5)
5 ANSWER 4.08 (2.00) a.
: b. To. minimize water hammer upon restart.                                           (0.5) 4
1.
                                                                      ---.-.= --        , . - -
80 inches 2.
metal 3.
hour
[3 0 0.5 each]
(1.5) b.
To insure natural circulation core cooling capability.
(0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Normal Shutdown to Cold Shutdown Procedure 3.2.1, P. 11 ANSWER 4.09 (2.00) a.
1.
Reactor feedwater pressure 3ess than 420 psig OR 2.
Reactornfeedwater temperature is less than 340 F.
3.
RWCU flow is returned to the RPV and allowed to repressure the feedwater piping.
[3 0 0.5 each]
(1.5) b.
To. minimize water hammer upon restart.
(0.5) 4
---.-.= --


  ~ Y. ' PROCEDURES-- NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND                                           PAGE       37
~ Y. ' PROCEDURES-- NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 37
          ,. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL ANSWERS -- WNP-2                                 -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
,. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL ANSWERS -- WNP-2
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Scram Procedure 3.3.1, PP. 2 and 3 1
REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Scram Procedure 3.3.1, PP. 2 and 3 1
l ANSWER             4.10         (2.75)                                                                     l l
ANSWER 4.10 (2.75) l o.
: o. 1. DECREASE
1.
: 2. INCREASE               .,,eg3 g ,yg,e pcg gu 4 w// mg e.ry/ & NWf RE    f#
DECREASE 2.
7 Notify control roo[m isupervisor.fj'S e
INCREASE
[4N j If d kge__  b 5 e h] ( 0)
.,,eg3 g,yg,e pcg gu 4 w// mg e.ry/ & NWf
N N"#
[4N b 5 e h] (
l
0)
: 1.                                                  h oe 44we-         r,             (0.25 Using redundant indications, verify reiii5 tor vessel MMM MV W)
Notify control roo[m isupervisor.fj'S j If d k N N"#
: b.                                                                                                     '
RE f#
7 h oe 44we-ge__ r, (0.25 e
verify reiii5 tor vessel MMM MV W) b.
1.
2.
2.
water level and drywell pressure are normal.                                     (0.5)
Using redundant indications, water level and drywell pressure are normal.
: 3. Shut HPCS injection valve (HPCS-V-4), and verify that the                   '
(0.5) 3.
flow valve opens. After confirming the HPCS   pump injection  was p^ inadvertent, stop the HPCS pump.                               (1.0)
Shut HPCS injection valve (HPCS-V-4), and verify that the flow valve opens.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure Inadvertent HPCS Startup, PP. 1 and 2 ANSWER           4.11         ( .50)
After confirming the HPCS pump p^ inadvertent, stop the HPCS pump.
FALSE                                                                                         (0.5)
(1.0) injection was REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure Inadvertent HPCS Startup, PP. 1 and 2 ANSWER 4.11
REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Procedure 5.0, P. 2 ANSWER           4.12         (2.75)
(.50)
RPV water level below +13.0 inches                                                           -(0.5)
FALSE (0.5)
RPV pressure above 1037 psig                                                                   (0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Procedure 5.0, P. 2 ANSWER 4.12 (2.75)
Drywell pressure above 1.65 psig                                                               (0,5)
RPV water level below +13.0 inches
A condition which requires MSIV isolation                                                     (0.5)
-(0.5)
A condition-which requires a reactor scram and reactor power is above 5% or cannot be determined.                                               (0.75)
RPV pressure above 1037 psig (0.5)
Drywell pressure above 1.65 psig (0,5)
A condition which requires MSIV isolation (0.5)
A condition-which requires a reactor scram and reactor power is above 5% or cannot be determined.
(0.75)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Procedure 5.1.2, P. 1
REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Procedure 5.1.2, P. 1


    , + > .
', + >.
L PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AE                                                               PAGE           38
L PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AE PAGE 38
      .          . RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL
. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL
        -A?SWERS -- WNP-2                                           -86/08/11-HANEK, J.
'-A?SWERS -- WNP-2
1 ANSWER                       4.13   -
-86/08/11-HANEK, J.
(1.50)
1 ANSWER 4.13 (1.50)
Haat removal from the reactor sufficient to restore and maintain fuel cladding temperature belos 2200 degrees F.                                                                     (1.5)
Haat removal from the reactor sufficient to restore and maintain fuel cladding temperature belos 2200 degrees F.
;          REFERENCE l         Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals, P. 6
(1.5)
:      ANSWER                     4.14               (1.50) 1
REFERENCE l
: 1.       Core submergence or (RPV level above TAF)
Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals, P. 6 ANSWER 4.14 (1.50) 1 1.
                      . Spray cooling or (core spray operating at or above design conditions)
Core submergence or (RPV level above TAF) 2.
,          2.
. Spray cooling or (core spray operating at or above design conditions) j 3.
j           3.         Steam cooling.                                                             [3 0 0.5 each] (1.5)
Steam cooling.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals, P. 6 W --                                                                -
[3 0 0.5 each]
W                       4.15               (2.50)                                                     /
(1.5)
A                                     9'''
REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals, P. 6 W --
: a.       1.
W 4.15 (2.50)
: 2.         5m E
/
utes   ff-LE          ,                  ,G (1.0;       i
A
: b.         Place the mode switch in shutdown and o                         at least one                                       !
,G 9'''
loop of                 in the suppression pool cooling mo ..                                        (1.5   l     i t
a.
                                                                                                                    ^                     '
1.
NCE                                                          ~~~
E ff-LE 2.
5m utes (1.0; b.
Place the mode switch in shutdown and o at least one loop of in the suppression pool cooling mo (1.5 l
i t
NCE
^
~~~
NNP-2, T;;h. Specs. ?.S.2.1 oud 4.0.2.-1~
NNP-2, T;;h. Specs. ?.S.2.1 oud 4.0.2.-1~
l ANSWER                     4.16               (2.50)
l ANSWER 4.16 (2.50) a.
: a.         1.         Manually scram the reactor.
1.
: 2.         Place the mode switch to shutdown.
Manually scram the reactor.
: 3.         Verify that APRM downscale lights are illuminated.
2.
: 4.         Transfer     recire pumps to the LFMG
Place the mode switch to shutdown.
: 5. Close all MSIV's                                                       [4 0   0.5 each)           (2.0)
3.
: b.       Shift Manager                                                                                         (0.5)
Verify that APRM downscale lights are illuminated.
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 4.12.1.1, P. 11 i
4.
Transfer recire pumps to the LFMG 5.
Close all MSIV's
[4 0 0.5 each)
(2.0) b.
Shift Manager (0.5)
REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 4.12.1.1, P.
11 i


D                                        ^S y
^S D
po                                 -
y po
                                                                                            =   -
=
U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR LICENSE EXAMINATION Facility: WNP-2 Reactor Type: BWR-GES Date Administered: August 11, 1986 Examiner: THOMAS R. MEADOWS, RV Candidate:
U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR LICENSE EXAMINATION Facility: WNP-2 Reactor Type: BWR-GES Date Administered: August 11, 1986 Examiner: THOMAS R. MEADOWS, RV Candidate:
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE Use separate paper for the answers. Write answers on one side only. Staple question sheet on top of the answer sheets. Points for each question are indicated in parentheses after the question. The passing grade requires at least 70% in each category and a final grade of at least 80%. Examination papers will be picked up six (6) hours after the examination starts.
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE Use separate paper for the answers. Write answers on one side only. Staple question sheet on top of the answer sheets. Points for each question are indicated in parentheses after the question. The passing grade requires at least 70% in each category and a final grade of at least 80%. Examination papers will be picked up six (6) hours after the examination starts.
                                                    % of Category   % of     Candidate's         Category Value     Total       Score             Value                         Category 25       25                                               5. Theory of Nuclear Power Plant Operation, Fluids, and Thermodynamics,                   .
% of Category
25       25                                               6. Plant Systems Design, Control and Instrumentation 25       25                                               7. Procedures - Normal.
% of Candidate's Category Value Total Score Value Category 25 25 5.
Abnormal, Emergency, and Radiological Control 25       25                                               8. Administrative Procedures, Conditions, and Limitations 100                                                               TOTALS Final Grade All work done on this examination is my can, I have neither given nor received aid.
Theory of Nuclear Power Plant Operation, Fluids, and Thermodynamics, 25 25 6.
Plant Systems Design, Control and Instrumentation 25 25 7.
Procedures - Normal.
Abnormal, Emergency, and Radiological Control 25 25 8.
Administrative Procedures, Conditions, and Limitations 100 TOTALS Final Grade All work done on this examination is my can, I have neither given nor received aid.
r Candidate's Signature l
r Candidate's Signature l


I i
I i
REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATION OF WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS
REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATION OF WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS 1.
: 1. A single room shall be provided for completing the written examina-tion. 'ihe location of this room and supporting restroom facilities i                                shall be such as to prevent contact with all other facility and/or
A single room shall be provided for completing the written examina-tion. 'ihe location of this room and supporting restroom facilities shall be such as to prevent contact with all other facility and/or i
;                                contractor personnel during the duration of the written examination.
contractor personnel during the duration of the written examination.
If necessary, the facility should make arrangements for the use of a suitable room at a local school, motel, or other building. ,Ob-taining this room is the responsibility of the licensee.
If necessary, the facility should make arrangements for the use of a suitable room at a local school, motel, or other building.,Ob-taining this room is the responsibility of the licensee.
: 2. Minimum spacing is required to ensure examination integrity as determined by the chief examiner. Minimum spacing should be one candidate per table, with a 3-ft space between tables. No wall charts, models, and/or other training materials shall be present in the examination room.
2.
: 3. Suitable arrangements shall be made by the facility if the candi-dates are to have lunch, coffee, or other refreshments. These arrangements shall comply with Ites 1 above. These arrangements shall be reviewed by the examiner and/or proctor.
Minimum spacing is required to ensure examination integrity as determined by the chief examiner.
                                                                                                                                  ~
Minimum spacing should be one candidate per table, with a 3-ft space between tables. No wall charts, models, and/or other training materials shall be present in the examination room.
: 4. The facility staff shall be provided a copy of the written examination                                                                 .
3.
and answer key after the last candidate has completed and handed in                                                                 '    -
Suitable arrangements shall be made by the facility if the candi-dates are to have lunch, coffee, or other refreshments. These arrangements shall comply with Ites 1 above. These arrangements shall be reviewed by the examiner and/or proctor.
his written examination. The facility staff shall then have five working days to provide formal written comments with supporting documentation on the examination and answer key to the chief examiner or to the regional
~
                  .              office section chief.
4.
5.- The licensee shall provide pads of 8-1/2 by 'll in. lined paper in unopened packages for each candidste's use in completing the exam-ination. The examiner shall distribute these pads to the candidates.
The facility staff shall be provided a copy of the written examination and answer key after the last candidate has completed and handed in his written examination. The facility staff shall then have five working days to provide formal written comments with supporting documentation on the examination and answer key to the chief examiner or to the regional office section chief.
5.-
The licensee shall provide pads of 8-1/2 by 'll in. lined paper in unopened packages for each candidste's use in completing the exam-ination. The examiner shall distribute these pads to the candidates.
All reference material needed to complete the examination shall be furnished by the examiner. Candidates can bring pens, pencils, calculators, or slide rules into the examination room, and no other equipment or reference material shall be allowed.
All reference material needed to complete the examination shall be furnished by the examiner. Candidates can bring pens, pencils, calculators, or slide rules into the examination room, and no other equipment or reference material shall be allowed.
: 6. Cnly black ink or dark pencils should be used for writing answers to questions.
6.
Cnly black ink or dark pencils should be used for writing answers to questions.
i P
i P
Examiner Standards
Examiner Standards


lo                   n   .                                                                                                                                                                l 4
lo n
NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS During the administration of this examination the following rules apply:
4 NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS During the administration of this examination the following rules apply:
: 1.                     Cheating on the . examination means an automatic denial of your application' and could result in more severe penalties.
1.
t                                                                                                                                                                                         l
Cheating on the. examination means an automatic denial of your application' and could result in more severe penalties.
: 2.                     Restroom trips are to be limited and only one candidate at a time may leave. You must avoid all contacts with anyone outside the examination                                                             -
t l
room to avoid even the appearance or possibility of cheating.
2.
: 3.                     Use black ink or dark pencil only to facilitate legible reproductions.
Restroom trips are to be limited and only one candidate at a time may leave. You must avoid all contacts with anyone outside the examination room to avoid even the appearance or possibility of cheating.
: 4.                     Print your name in the blank provided on the cover sheet of the examination.                                                                                                         .                  !
3.
                ~
Use black ink or dark pencil only to facilitate legible reproductions.
: 5.                     Fill in the date on the cover sheet of the examination (if necessary).
4.
: 6.                     Use only the paper provided for answers.
Print your name in the blank provided on the cover sheet of the examination.
: 7.                     Print your name in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section of the answer sheet.
~
l
5.
: 8.                                                                                                                       " as                                :
Fill in the date on the cover sheet of the examination (if necessary).
Consecutively appropriate, start number       each answer each category    on a new  sheet,           page,  write "End write onlyofone Category s                      ,,,ide of the paper, and write "Last Page" on the last answer sheet.
6.
                                                                                                                                                                                          )
Use only the paper provided for answers.
: 9.                     Number each answer as to category and number, for example,1.4, 6.3.                                                         -
7.
Print your name in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section of the answer sheet.
8.
Consecutively number each answer sheet, write "End of Category,,,ide of
" as appropriate, start each category on a new page, write only one s the paper, and write "Last Page" on the last answer sheet.
)
9.
Number each answer as to category and number, for example,1.4, 6.3.
: 10. Skip at least three lines between each answer.
)
4
4
: 10. Skip at least three lines between each answer.                                                                                                            )
: 11. Separate answer sheets from pad and place finished answer sheets face down on your desk or table.
                  ,        11. Separate answer sheets from pad and place finished answer sheets face                                                                               '
down on your desk or table.                         -                    -
: 12. Use abbreviations only if they are commonly used in facility literature.
: 12. Use abbreviations only if they are commonly used in facility literature.
: 13. The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question and can be used as a guide for the depth of answer required.
: 13. The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question and can be used as a guide for the depth of answer required.
: 14. Show all calculations, methods, or assumptions used to obtain an answer to mathematical problems whether indicated in the question or not.
: 14. Show all calculations, methods, or assumptions used to obtain an answer to mathematical problems whether indicated in the question or not.
: 15.                   Partial credit may be given. Therefore, ANSWER ALL PARTS OF THE QUESTION AND D0 NOT LEAVE ANY ANSWER ~ BLANK.
15.
: 16.                   If parts of the examination are not clear as to intent, ask questions of the examiner only.
Partial credit may be given. Therefore, ANSWER ALL PARTS OF THE QUESTION AND D0 NOT LEAVE ANY ANSWER ~ BLANK.
: 17. You must sign the statement on the cover sheet that indicates that the                                                                                     '
16.
work is your own and you have not received or been given assittance in completing the examination. This must be done after the examination has been completed.
If parts of the examination are not clear as to intent, ask questions of the examiner only.
Examiner Standards                                                             ,
: 17. You must sign the statement on the cover sheet that indicates that the work is your own and you have not received or been given assittance in completing the examination. This must be done after the examination has been completed.
l l
Examiner Standards l
: 18. When you complete your examination, you shall:                                         .,
l
: s.         Assemble your examination as follows:
: 18. When you complete your examination, you shall:
                                        .      (1) Exam questions on top.                                                                              .
s.
Assemble your examination as follows:
(1) Exam questions on top.
(2) Exam aids - figures, tables, etc.
(2) Exam aids - figures, tables, etc.
(3) Answer pages including figures which are a part of the answer.
(3) Answer pages including figures which are a part of the answer.
: b.         Turn in your copy of the examination and all pages used to answer the examination questions.                               ,
b.
: c.         Turn in all scrap paper and the balance of the paper that you did
Turn in your copy of the examination and all pages used to answer the examination questions.
                                          , not use for answering the questions.
c.
d.-       Leave the examination area, as defined by the examiner.                                     If after leaving, you are found in this area while the examination is still in progress, your license may be denied or revoked.
Turn in all scrap paper and the balance of the paper that you did
                                                                                                                                  "o e
, not use for answering the questions.
I l                                                                                                                                     .
d.-
Examiner Standards                                                     .
Leave the examination area, as defined by the examiner.
If after leaving, you are found in this area while the examination is still in progress, your license may be denied or revoked.
"o e
I l
Examiner Standards


O   1 1
O 1
EQUATION SHEET                                                                                                                             I l
1 EQUATION SHEET l
l
~ '"
                                            ~ '"                               ***E w = mg s = v,t + at 2      Cycle efficiency = Net Work (out)-                                                                  l Energy (in)
***E Cycle efficiency = Net Work (out)-
E = mC a = (vg - v )/t KE = mv                                 vg=v           + at                 A = AN                                         A = A,e PE = agh                                 w = 8/t                             A = in 2/tg = 0.693/tg W = VAP g(eff) = (ti; )(ts)
2 w = mg s = v,t +
                                                                                                                  't AE = 931Am
l at Energy (in)
( +           )
E = mC a = (vg - v )/t KE = mv vg=v + at A = AN A = A,e PE = agh w = 8/t A = in 2/tg = 0.693/tg W = VAP g(eff) = (t )(t )
Q=$
i; s
CATP                                                      ,    I . I e'EX         o Q = UAAT
't AE = 931Am
                                                    ~
(
I.Ie -UX Pwr = Wg' E I=I 10-x h P=P                10 5UR(t)
+
TVL = 1.3/u                                                                                         !
)
i y.p .t/T                                                                     HVL = 0.693/u O
Q=$ CAT I. I e'EX P
<                                    SUR = 26.06/T                                                                                                                                                     ~
o Q = UAAT
T = 1.44 DT                                                                   SCR = S/(1 - K,gg)
-UX I.Ie Pwr = W ' E
SUR = 26
-x h
                                                            /A*fr ) o CR g,p                                                                 = S/(1 - K,gg )
~
g I=I 10 5UR(t)
P=P 10 TVL = 1.3/u y.p.t/T HVL = 0.693/u i
O SUR = 26.06/T
~
T = 1.44 DT SCR = S/(1 - K,gg)
/A*fr )
o SUR = 26 CR g,p
= S/(1 - K,gg )
1(
eff}} "
eff}} "
                                                                                                                                          ~
2(I ~ Edf)b T = I(i*/p ) + [(f 'p)/A,g,p]
T = I(i*/p ) + [(f 'p)/A,g,p]                                                       1(                                                      2(I ~ Edf)b T = 1*/ (p - E
~
                                          ,                                                                        M " I/Cl - Kefg) = CR g/CR0
T = 1*/ (p - E M " I/Cl - Kefg) = CR /CR g
( ~ 8)! eff' M = (1 - K,gg)0/(1 - K,gg)g 8*I eff'I)! eff = AK,ff/Kaff SDM = (1 - Keff)/Keff p=              [1*/TK,'gf -] + [I/(1 + A,gfT )]
0
                                                                                                                                                                                                                  ~
( ~ 8)! eff' M = (1 - K,gg)0 (1 - K,gg)g
1* = 1 x 10 seconds                                                                                 l P = I$V/(3 x 1010)                                                           g aff =       A 0.1 seconds I = Na                                                                     -
/
1 Idly =Id22                                                                                           i WATER PARAMETERS                                                               Id           =Id2 g
8*I eff'I)! eff = AK,ff/Kaff SDM = (1 - Keff)/Keff
1 gal. = 8.345 lbm R/hr = (0.5 CE)/d (meters) 1 gal. = 3.78 liters R/hr = 6 CE/d (feet)
[1*/TK,'gf -] + [I/(1 + A,gf )]
I ft3 = 7.48 gal.                                                             HISCELLANEOUS CONVERSIONS                                                               .
1* = 1 x 10 seconds p=
i                                                       ~
~
Density = 62.4 lbm/ft                                                                                                                     10 1 Curie = 3.7 x 10 dps 3
T P = I$V/(3 x 1010) gaff = 0.1 seconds A
Density = 1 gm/cm                                                             1 kg = 2.21 1ha Heat of varorizationi = 970 Etu/lbm                                           I hp = 2.54 x 10 3BTU /hr Heat of fusica = 144 Btu /lbm                                                   1 Hw = 3.41 x 10 Btu /hr 0
I = Na Idly =Id22 WATER PARAMETERS Id =Id g
1 Atm = 14.7 Psi = 29.9 in, l's.                                               1 Btu = 778 ft-lbf 1 ft. H 0 = 0,4333 lbf/in 2 g                                                          1 inch = 2.54 cm F = 9/5 C + 32 C = 5/9 (*F - 32) t 3 _.-, - -   - - - ,          ,-..,,-,.e       -
2 1 gal. = 8.345 lbm R/hr = (0.5 CE)/d (meters) 1 gal. = 3.78 liters R/hr = 6 CE/d (feet)
                                                                  ,          s  n e - --,-     ,-m-----,,.n         ,......n.-,,.,,,,,.,,---a,                     - , , , . . . , . - -        .-...,n--. y..    ..
I ft3 = 7.48 gal.
HISCELLANEOUS CONVERSIONS i
Density = 62.4 lbm/ft 1 Curie = 3.7 x 10 dps
~
10 3
Density = 1 gm/cm 1 kg = 2.21 1ha 3
Heat of varorizationi = 970 Etu/lbm I hp = 2.54 x 10 BTU /hr 0
Heat of fusica = 144 Btu /lbm 1 Hw = 3.41 x 10 Btu /hr 1 Atm = 14.7 Psi = 29.9 in, l's.
1 Btu = 778 ft-lbf 2
1 ft. H 0 = 0,4333 lbf/in 1 inch = 2.54 cm g
F = 9/5 C + 32 C = 5/9 (*F - 32) t 3 _.-, - -
,-..,,-,.e s
n e - --,-
,-m-----,,.n
,......n.-,,.,,,,,.,,---a,
.-...,n--.
y..


' 7 SECTION 5 Theory of Nuclear Power Plant Operations, Fluids and Thermodynamics 5.1   (1.0)
7 SECTION 5 Theory of Nuclear Power Plant Operations, Fluids and Thermodynamics 5.1 (1.0)
As a subcritical reactor nears criticality, the length of time to reach equilibrium count rate after an insertion of given fixed amount of positive reactivity. . .
As a subcritical reactor nears criticality, the length of time to reach equilibrium count rate after an insertion of given fixed amount of positive reactivity...
(SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER) ta) decreases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.
(SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER) ta) decreases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.
(b) increases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.
(b) increases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.
(c) increases because of a larger number of neutron life cycles required to reach equilibrium.                   ,
(c) increases because of a larger number of neutron life cycles required to reach equilibrium.
(d) decreases because the source neutrons are becoming less important in relation to total neutron population.
(d) decreases because the source neutrons are becoming less important in relation to total neutron population.
(c)
(c)
Ref: Reactor Theory-Student text 5-1 1
Ref: Reactor Theory-Student text 5-1
l


o a 5.2   (2.0)
o a
5.2 (2.0)
Why is the value of Keff INDEPENDENT of initial source range counts ?
Why is the value of Keff INDEPENDENT of initial source range counts ?
INDEPENDENT- Keff (the neutron life cycle) only considers fission neutrons in the self-sustaining reaction.
INDEPENDENT-Keff (the neutron life cycle) only considers fission neutrons in the self-sustaining reaction.
Ref: Reactor Theory- Student text I
Ref: Reactor Theory-Student text I
1 6
1 6
e
e
* i 5.3   (2.0)
 
i 5.3 (2.0)
Answer the following TRUE or FALSE:
Answer the following TRUE or FALSE:
(a) During equilibrium power conditions,the production rate of indirect Xenon from Iodine is faster than the decay rate of Xenon to Cesium.                 (0.5) f (b) Slowing the rate of a power decrease, lowers the height of the resultant Xenon peak.               (O.5)
(a) During equilibrium power conditions,the production rate of indirect Xenon from Iodine is faster than the decay rate of Xenon to Cesium.
(0.5) f (b) Slowing the rate of a power decrease, lowers the height of the resultant Xenon peak.
(O.5)
(c) The resultant Xenon peak due to a scram from 50%
(c) The resultant Xenon peak due to a scram from 50%
power is larger than one from 100% power.         (0.5)
power is larger than one from 100% power.
(d) During an increase in power from equilibrium       (0.5)
(0.5)
(d) During an increase in power from equilibrium (0.5)
Xenon conditions, Xenon concentration initially decreases.
Xenon conditions, Xenon concentration initially decreases.
(a) TRUE (b) TRUE (c) FALSE                                                   ,
(a) TRUE (b) TRUE (c) FALSE (d) TRUE Ref: Reactor Tneory - Student Text 6
(d) TRUE Ref: Reactor Tneory - Student Text 6
9 4
9 4
3-5
3-5


  '    9 l
9 l
s 1
s 1
5.4   (3.0)
5.4 (3.0)
(a) Will the resonance escape probability INCREASE or DECREASE with increasing void fraction 7           (0.5)
(a) Will the resonance escape probability INCREASE or DECREASE with increasing void fraction 7 (0.5)
(b) What is the reason or basis for your answer above? (2.5)
(b) What is the reason or basis for your answer above? (2.5)
DECREASE- The reason for this effect is that an increased number of voids results.in less neutron moderation,which results in an increase in the average distance traveled (and time required) by a neutron while slowing down to thermal energy levels-- neutrons spend more time.in the resonance capture energy region, resulting in increased RESONANCE l
DECREASE-The reason for this effect is that an increased number of voids results.in less neutron moderation,which results in an increase in the average distance traveled (and time required) by a neutron while slowing down to thermal energy levels-- neutrons spend more time.in the resonance capture energy region, resulting in increased RESONANCE l
ABSORPTION, hence a DECREASED resonance escape probability.
ABSORPTION, hence a DECREASED resonance escape probability.
2 Ref: Reactor Theory- Student Text i
2 Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text i
4 i'
4 i'
4 l
4 l
Line 1,245: Line 1,926:


a 1
a 1
5.5   (1.0)
5.5 (1.0)
What two physical phenomena ( specifically related to the neutron life cycle and fuel characteristics)       along with increasing fael temperature, contribute to a negative doppler coefficient? NAME THESE TWO(2) PHENOMENA (0.5 points each)
What two physical phenomena ( specifically related to the neutron life cycle and fuel characteristics) along with increasing fael temperature, contribute to a negative doppler coefficient? NAME THESE TWO(2) PHENOMENA (0.5 points each)
(e)   Resonance broadening-neutron absorbtion at other than descrete energies (Doppler Effect)
(e)
(b)   Self-Shielding (heterogeneoun fuel pins)
Resonance broadening-neutron absorbtion at other than descrete energies (Doppler Effect)
Ref: Reactor Theory- Student Text 5-5
(b)
Self-Shielding (heterogeneoun fuel pins)
Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text 5-5


e 5.6   (4.0)
e 5.6 (4.0)
Prior to performing a control rod notch calibration for the reactor engineer, the reactor is just critical at O.002%
Prior to performing a control rod notch calibration for the reactor engineer, the reactor is just critical at O.002%
power. A control rod is subsequently withdrawn one notch and reactor power increases on a steady period with a DOUBLING TIME of 40 seconds.
power. A control rod is subsequently withdrawn one notch and reactor power increases on a steady period with a DOUBLING TIME of 40 seconds.
(a) What is the notch atrength (&K/K per notch) of the withdrawn control rod?                                     (2.0)
(a) What is the notch atrength (&K/K per notch) of the withdrawn control rod?
      -(b) How long will it '.ake to reach O.08% power?               (2.0)
(2.0)
SHOW ALL WORK AND ASSUMPTION 3 (a)   P=Po e (t /T) . . . . P=2Po 2=e(DT/T)           ,,DT=Deubling Time T In2 = DT.....T=4(/In2 T= 57.7 seconds 4 K/K=AK/Kred = U/1+3T       ,, any reasonable assumption:
-(b) How long will it '.ake to reach O.08% power?
(2.0)
SHOW ALL WORK AND ASSUMPTION 3 (a)
P=Po e (t /T).... P=2Po 2=e(DT/T)
,,DT=Deubling Time T In2 = DT.....T=4(/In2 T= 57.7 seconds 4 K/K=AK/Kred = U/1+3T any reasonable assumption:
b O.OO70 4K/K
b O.OO70 4K/K
                                            %=0.isec-4K/K= 0. 0070/1+ (0.1) (57. 7) = 0.103 % 4K/K (b) 0.002% to 0.08% power change:
%=0.isec-4K/K= 0. 0070/1+ (0.1) (57. 7) = 0.103 % 4K/K (b) 0.002% to 0.08% power change:
P=Po e(t/T),
P=Po e(t/T),
0.08% = 0.002% ett/T),,(Any T used from above acceptable) - solve for t t=212.8 seconds Ref: Reactor Theory - Student Text i
0.08% = 0.002% ett/T),,(Any T used from above acceptable) - solve for t t=212.8 seconds Ref: Reactor Theory - Student Text i
I l
5-6
l 5-6                                                               l 1


l 6
6 5.7 (2.0)
5.7     (2.0)
How can the REVERSE POWER EFFECT occur in the core during control rod movements 7 J
How can the REVERSE POWER EFFECT         occur in the core during control rod movements 7 J
Reverse power effect is a decrease in overall core power upon the notch withdraw of a shallow control rod. An with deep rod control, local bundle power will increase as the i
Reverse power effect is a decrease in overall core power
rod is withdrawn;however, in the lower regions of the core it is possible for the voiding effect created within-the i
;          upon the notch withdraw of a shallow control rod. An with
affected bundle by shallow rod withdraw to overrice the associated local power increase, subsequently lowering overall core power.
:          deep rod control, local bundle power will increase as the i           rod is withdrawn;however, in the lower regions of the core
4 Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text j
,            it is possible for the voiding effect created within-the i           affected bundle by shallow rod withdraw to overrice the associated local power increase, subsequently lowering 4
overall core power.
Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text j
.5 1
.5 1
i s
i s
Line 1,279: Line 1,962:
1
1
:1 I
:1 I
l .
l J
J 4
4 f
f 5-7
5-7


e   ,                                                                                                                l 1
e 1
I 5.8 (4.0)
I 5.8 (4.0)
The reactor is operating at 70% power. Recirculation flow is subsequently increased to provide stable 100% power and 100%
The reactor is operating at 70% power. Recirculation flow is subsequently increased to provide stable 100% power and 100%
flow conditions :
flow conditions :
(a) Why did the boiling boundry INITIALLY move further up the core?                                                                                     (1.0)
(a) Why did the boiling boundry INITIALLY move further up the core?
(1.0)
(b) What causes the boiling boundry to return to near its original axial position and power to stabilize?(2.0)
(b) What causes the boiling boundry to return to near its original axial position and power to stabilize?(2.0)
(c) Why did the new boiling boundry stabilize at a SLIGHTLY higher core position 7                                                                 ( 1. 0).
(c) Why did the new boiling boundry stabilize at a SLIGHTLY higher core position 7
( 1. 0).
(a) Initialy the water will travel further up the core before reaching saturation conditions because it spends less time in contact with the rods at a given point at higher flow rates. The boiling boundry subsequently moves further up the core.
(a) Initialy the water will travel further up the core before reaching saturation conditions because it spends less time in contact with the rods at a given point at higher flow rates. The boiling boundry subsequently moves further up the core.
(b) As voids are initially displaced, resulting increased neutron moderation adds positive reactivity, and increases power. The power increase subsequently causes increased boiling - lowering the boiling boundry to near its original panition. The negative reactivity added by the return of voids and increased fuel temperatures offuets the positive reactivity added by increased flow-stabilizing power.
(b) As voids are initially displaced, resulting increased neutron moderation adds positive reactivity, and increases power. The power increase subsequently causes increased boiling - lowering the boiling boundry to near its original panition. The negative reactivity added by the return of voids and increased fuel temperatures offuets the positive reactivity added by increased flow-stabilizing power.
(c) The boiling boundry stabilizes slightly higher                                                 ,
(c) The boiling boundry stabilizes slightly higher providing positive reactivity (more moderation), to offuet the negative reactivity inserted by the doppler coefficient at higher fuel temperatures.
providing positive reactivity (more moderation), to offuet the negative reactivity inserted by the doppler coefficient at higher fuel temperatures.
Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, FNP2 Systems - Reactor Recirculation Flow Contal 5-8
Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, FNP2 Systems - Reactor Recirculation Flow Contal 5-8


  ,e                     i s              5.9     (2.0)
,e i
What is the reason or basis for the MAPLHGR f                                   THERMAL LIMIT ?
5.9 (2.0) s What is the reason or basis for the MAPLHGR f
To prevent fuel cladding disintegration (" gross cladding failure" ) during a DBA LOCA by limiting the peak clad temperature to < 2200 degrees F-- (limiting bundle stored energy such that any given fuel pin at any given axial / planer point will have a peak clad temperature below 2200 degrees F during a DBA LOCA dry-out condition. 2200 degrees assures that the cladding will not t
THERMAL LIMIT ?
I disintegrate-brittle fracture-upon the subsequent rewetting I                                   by low pressure ECCS).
To prevent fuel cladding disintegration
!                                  Ref: General Electric- Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and
(" gross cladding failure" ) during a DBA LOCA by limiting the peak clad temperature to < 2200 degrees F--
!                                          Fluid Flow, Technical Specifications I
(limiting bundle stored energy such that any given fuel pin at any given axial / planer point will have a peak clad temperature below 2200 degrees F during a DBA LOCA dry-out condition. 2200 degrees assures that the cladding will not t
I disintegrate-brittle fracture-upon the subsequent rewetting I
by low pressure ECCS).
Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Technical Specifications I
k 1
k 1
I                                                                                                                                     i i
I i
i
)
)
a i                                                                                                                                                     l O
a l
i O
T l
T l
5-9
5-9


5.10   (1.0)
5.10 (1.0)
What is the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR?
What is the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR?
MAPRAT = APLHGR/MAPLHGR Limit -or- APLHGR (actual)/ MAPLHGR (LCO ma:< )
MAPRAT = APLHGR/MAPLHGR Limit -or-APLHGR (actual)/ MAPLHGR (LCO ma:< )
Ref: General Electric- Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid F1ow t
Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid F1ow t
5-10
5-10


a e 5.11   (0.5)
a e
5.11 (0.5)
Of the following operations,which DNE will have a negative effect (reducing effect) on available Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) of a given centrifugal pump:
Of the following operations,which DNE will have a negative effect (reducing effect) on available Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) of a given centrifugal pump:
(a) Throttling open the pump's suction valve.
(a) Throttling open the pump's suction valve.
Line 1,322: Line 2,012:
(d) Decreasing the temperature of the fluid (water) being pumped.
(d) Decreasing the temperature of the fluid (water) being pumped.
(b)
(b)
Ref: General Electric- Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and
Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow i
.-            Fluid Flow i
l l
l l
I 9
9 5-11
5-11


0                 0 5.12     (0.5)
0 0
5.12 (0.5)
Consider a real plant system (NON-IDEAL) with two centrifugal pumps in parallel, one of which is running at 1800 RPM. The second pump is started and run at 1000 RPM.
Consider a real plant system (NON-IDEAL) with two centrifugal pumps in parallel, one of which is running at 1800 RPM. The second pump is started and run at 1000 RPM.
l                                   System flow will be...
l System flow will be...
;                                    SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER i
SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER i
i                                     (a) more than double the original flow due to decreased flow resistance.
i (a) more than double the original flow due to decreased flow resistance.
(b) slightly less than double the original flow due to increased flow resistance.
(b) slightly less than double the original flow due to increased flow resistance.
(c) the same since only the dicharge head changes.
(c) the same since only the dicharge head changes.
(d) reduced by one-half due to increased discharge head.
(d) reduced by one-half due to increased discharge head.
(b) 4 Ref: General Electric- Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow 4
(b) 4 Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow 4
l i
l i
l 4
l 4
1 i
1 i
]                                                                                                                                           !
]
1 G-12
1 G-12


Line 1,350: Line 2,039:
4 5-13
4 5-13


                                                    -.                                    .=.                                     _                        ._ __ _                                                . -    - _ _ _ _ _ . - - _ _ - -                                                                      -
.=.
i 1
i 1
1 i>                                                                                                                                             .                                                        .
1 i>
45 T                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     -
45 T
                                                  . M.                                                                                              .
. M.
  )
)
l                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             l EXTRACTION STEM                                                                                                                'O l
l l
i
'O
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    .to 1,                            .
.to EXTRACTION STEM i
N                       5\
l N
8-                                                                                 i 1
5\\
                                          /~f -                   ,-                                                    CONDENSER V
1, 8-i
7' 49
/~f -
                            .                                                                                                              5                                           -
V 7'
  <                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            l 5
1 CONDENSER 49 5
l 5
l r
l r
4
4 c
  '                                                                                                                                      Figure                               c
Figure
: 5. B^
: 5. B^
* se W                                                                                                                                                                                                                 .
* se W
                                                                      .                                                                  *                                                                                                                .S . *.                                  .
.S..
l
l 1
* 1 1
l 1
l I                                                                                                               .
I e
e J                                                                                                                                                                                                                       .
J a
a I
I e
* e
* WD e e
* WD e e                                                                                                                                                                             ,


l
l i
                                                                                                                                                    .                                                                                              i
i s.
                                  ..                                                                                                                                                                                                              i
i I
                                                                                                                                  ,                              s.
F'LUID REGION MINT i
i                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 l I                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           -
n j
F'LUID REGION                                                                             MINT                 -
y MMTED VAPOR T
i n                                                                                                                                                                                                                   j y                                                                                               .
SbBC00 LED REGION T
T                      .
i 5G 91n l
MMTED VAPOR                                                           .
W HP TURBINC '
T i
out
SbBC00 LED REGION 5G 91n l
'6
W out HP TURBINC '                   '
~ b bMb_ '_ _ _
                                                                                                                                                                                      '6
~
                                                                              ~
4 SN" "out LP TURDInc 1
                                                                                                      ~ b bMb_ '_ _ _                                                                                                                             '
FEEDWATER HEATING u
4                 SN" "out LP TURDInc FEEDWATER HEATING 1
7
u 7                                                                         V
\\
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  \
V 7.
CONDENSER 7.
CONDENSER SATURATED LIQUID LINE l
SATURATED LIQUID LINE                                                                               .
s Figure
l s
---KEY 5.1-3^--
Figure            #    ---KEY 5 .1-3^--
e g.
* e                                                           g.
I s
I s
f                                                                                                                                       4                                                           ,
f 4
e o
e o
e e em e e
e e em e e
  -.---,e,------g.,g               w-----m------+         ,y.,-       --,n       e.---     -e.--..   --,_-_,--,.w.,,-,w-r-                   ,.      ,m.ne,-                 ------.---n---e-,,-e             v,   e.,, - - - , ----     --e
-.---,e,------g.,g w-----m------+
,y.,-
--,n e.---
-e.--..
--,_-_,--,.w.,,-,w-r-
,m.ne,-
------.---n---e-,,-e v,
e.,, - - -, ----
--e


4 SECTION 6.0 t               Plant Systems Design, Control, and Instrumentation 6.1   (1.5)
4 SECTION 6.0 t
I         List three(3) of the four(4) major ESF 4160 Vac component loads supplied by critical switchgear bus SM-B division 2.
Plant Systems Design, Control, and Instrumentation 6.1 (1.5)
I List three(3) of the four(4) major ESF 4160 Vac component loads supplied by critical switchgear bus SM-B division 2.
(0.5 points each)
(0.5 points each)
Any three of the following:
Any three of the following:
!          RHR Pump B RHR Pump C SSW Pump 1D (B)
RHR Pump B RHR Pump C SSW Pump 1D (B)
CRD Pump 1B (B)
CRD Pump 1B (B)
Ref: WNP2 Systems- A.C. Distribution i
Ref: WNP2 Systems-A.C.
Distribution i
+
+
                  +.
+.
1
1
't 6-1
't 6-1


E 6.2   (0.5)                                 .
E 6.2 (0.5)
FILL IN THE BLANK Each D.C. division battery system has sufficient capacity to +
FILL IN THE BLANK Each D.C.
supply the DC power requirements of the
division battery system has sufficient capacity to
                                          ~
+
redundant (Division   ,
supply the DC power requirements of the redundant (Division
1 and 2) load groups f or at least       hour (s) following loss of power to the battery chargers (station black-out) coincident with a design bases accident.                   N two (2)
~
Ref: WNP2 Systems- D.C. Power System l
1 and 2) load groups f or at least hour (s) following loss of power to the battery chargers (station black-out) coincident with a design bases accident.
N two (2)
Ref: WNP2 Systems-D.C.
Power System l
0 5-2
0 5-2
                              ~
~


6.3   (3.0)
6.3 (3.0)
What is the reason or basis f or the 105 secored initiation logic time delay in each of the two ADS logic channels (A/C and B/D respectively)? (include in your dicussion the reason that this time delay is not set for a longer period)
What is the reason or basis f or the 105 secored initiation logic time delay in each of the two ADS logic channels (A/C and B/D respectively)? (include in your dicussion the reason that this time delay is not set for a longer period)
This time delay is intended to allow HPCS sufficient time to reflood the vessel in the event of a small to intermediate break, but not so long that the RHR(LPCI) and LPCS systems would be unable to cool the fuel, coincident with a HPCS failure to start when ADS is relied upon to provide depressurization.
This time delay is intended to allow HPCS sufficient time to reflood the vessel in the event of a small to intermediate break, but not so long that the RHR(LPCI) and LPCS systems would be unable to cool the fuel, coincident with a HPCS failure to start when ADS is relied upon to provide depressurization.
Ref: WNP2 Systems- ADS 1
Ref: WNP2 Systems-ADS 1
1 l
1
i l
- ~
      - ~                                                             , , . . _ _ . , _


6.4   (3.0)
6.4 (3.0)
A level two(2) RPV level trip at -50" will initiate NSSSS Isolation, Groups 1,2,3,4,L7.
A level two(2) RPV level trip at -50" will initiate NSSSS Isolation, Groups 1,2,3,4,L7.
What are the other three(3) trip functions associated with this level trip 7
What are the other three(3) trip functions associated with this level trip 7
( 1.0 pt. each) 1 (a) Initiate RCIC i
( 1.0 pt. each) 1 (a) Initiate RCIC i
j (b) Initiate HPCS (including the HPCS D/G)
(b) Initiate HPCS (including the HPCS D/G) j (c) Trip the Recirculation pumps Ref: WNP2 Systems-Nuclear Boiler Instrunentat on 9
(c) Trip the Recirculation pumps Ref: WNP2 Systems- Nuclear Boiler Instrunentat on.
6-4
9 6-4


s 6.5 (2.5)
s 6.5 (2.5)
A 10 minute time delay after a LFCI initiation sional def eat = 41-1 . o close signals to/CPCI injection - val ves V
A 10 minute time delay after a LFCI initiation sional def eat = 41-1.
HR-V-53A and What are two(2) reasons that this ECCS flow path is
o close signals to/CPCI injection - val ves HR-V-53A and V
What are two(2) reasons that this ECCS flow path is
_ preferred?
_ preferred?
( 1.25 pts each )
( 1.25 pts each )
                                          ,,,,.y-              0] [f0' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' "
0] [f0' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' "
(a)   To prevent cold water transients that would occur if direct core injection were used.
,,,,.y-(a)
(b)     To prevent baron dilution accidents, if baron had been injected in an emergency conditions, f)
To prevent cold water transients that would occur if direct core injection were used.
Ref: WNP2 Systerrs- RHR eag 9
(b)
9,.,2-m.                             z     ~~ ?~~
To prevent baron dilution accidents, if baron had been injected in an emergency conditions, f)
(n) ms n a,- ~ w                 - - ? c e 7.r s ,s e c r i >-     /~r,or ru e A'P V s.~er w -
Ref: WNP2 Systerrs-RHR eag 9
fg) gt ~g'seWff           7Nsf         /"t p *.- s e !"M   s ".7N ES     /,Wd*C ff Y / "5"/#d '
~~ ?~~
                "r     r~xo~s     ,    r       a, - < o     n,,     , , .  ,,,,.cies       er
9,.,2-m.
              /   Al*C /^* C - g p pg*     gyg j g 1
z (n) ms n a,- ~ w
- - ? c e 7.r s,s e c r i >-
/~r,or ru e A'P V s.~er w -
fg) gt ~g'seWff 7Nsf
/"t p *.- s e !"M s ".7N ES
/,Wd*C ff Y / "5"/#d '
"r r~xo~s r
a, - < o n,,
,,,,.cies er
/
Al*C /^* C -
g p pg*
gyg j g 1
a 6-5 7
a 6-5 7


6.6   (0.5)
6.6 (0.5)
At what RPV pressure (decreasing).will the LPCI injection valves receive an open permissive signal after LPCI logic i                       initiation 7 1
At what RPV pressure (decreasing).will the LPCI injection valves receive an open permissive signal after LPCI logic i
i 470 psig
initiation 7 1
    ~
i 470 psig Ref: WrJP2 Systems-RHR
Ref: WrJP2 Systems- RHR e
~
I 1
e I
l i
1 l
i
i i
      ~
~'R l
i
i 4
      'R                                                                                                                                                         l 4
i I.
i I.
i e
i e
Line 1,480: Line 2,191:
i b~h i
i b~h i


o   .
o 6.7 (1.5)
6.7   (1.5)
What three conditions will result in an IRM inoperative rod block ? (0.5 points each)
What three conditions will result in an IRM inoperative rod block ? (0.5 points each)
Detectcr High Volts Low Module Unplugged IRM Mode (Function) Switch not in operate Ref: WNP2 Systems- IRM 6-7
Detectcr High Volts Low Module Unplugged IRM Mode (Function) Switch not in operate Ref: WNP2 Systems-IRM 6-7


s .
s 6.9 (1.5)
6.9         (1.5)
The gamma flux error signal IS discriminated against in the intermeadiate power range.
The gamma flux error signal IS discriminated against in the intermeadiate power range.
How is this accomolished by the IRM system 7 t
How is this accomolished by the IRM system 7 t
Gamma discrimination is still necessary in the intermediate power range,but is not accomplished by means of an active discrimination circuit. Gamma discrimination in the IRM system is a natural censequence of the mean-square-analog (Campbell) method of measurement,such that the gamma contribution to the output signal becomes insignificant. (a dctailed discussion of circuit operation or "Campbelling" is not required)
Gamma discrimination is still necessary in the intermediate power range,but is not accomplished by means of an active discrimination circuit. Gamma discrimination in the IRM system is a natural censequence of the mean-square-analog (Campbell) method of measurement,such that the gamma contribution to the output signal becomes insignificant. (a dctailed discussion of circuit operation or "Campbelling" is not required)
Ref: WNP2 Systems- IRM                                                           <
Ref: WNP2 Systems-IRM 1
1 f
f r
r 6-8
6-8


    =
=
6.9   (3.0)
6.9 (3.0)
For each of the f ollowing scram signals, state the' reactor mode switch position (include necessary opernting conditions and/or component positions)   that WILL bypass the scram signal:
For each of the f ollowing scram signals, state the' reactor mode switch position (include necessary opernting conditions and/or component positions) that WILL bypass the scram signal:
(0.5 points each)
(0.5 points each)
(a) IRM INOP (b) IRM Hi-Hi (c) APRM Hi-Hi (15%)
(a) IRM INOP (b) IRM Hi-Hi (c) APRM Hi-Hi (15%)
(d) APRM Hi-Hi (118%)
(d) APRM Hi-Hi (118%)
(e) SCRAM Discharge Volume (f) MSIV Closure (a) Run mode i
(e) SCRAM Discharge Volume (f) MSIV Closure (a) Run mode i
(b) Run made (c) Run modo (d) not in Run Mode (e) In S/D or Refuel, and SDV keylock switch in bypass (f) not in Run Mode, and < 1056 psig Ref: WNP2 Systems- RPS                                       ,
(b) Run made (c) Run modo (d) not in Run Mode (e) In S/D or Refuel, and SDV keylock switch in bypass (f) not in Run Mode, and < 1056 psig Ref: WNP2 Systems-RPS l
l l
i 6-9
i l
l 1
l 6-9


6.10   (2.5)
6.10 (2.5)
What is a Non-Coincidence Scram? (Include what scram trips can be set up for non-coincidence, how set up is accomplished, and when non-coincidence is used)
What is a Non-Coincidence Scram? (Include what scram trips can be set up for non-coincidence, how set up is accomplished, and when non-coincidence is used)
With shorting links removed, any one SRM,IFM, or APRM (Nuclear Instrumentation) scram signal from any RPS channel will result in a full scram. This non-coincident nuclear instrumentation scram capability is used during initial core loadingjd5duringsometestingj#63hutdownmargin demonstrationsf"lollowing any refueling cycle.
With shorting links removed, any one SRM,IFM, or APRM (Nuclear Instrumentation) scram signal from any RPS channel will result in a full scram. This non-coincident nuclear instrumentation scram capability is used during initial core loadingjd5duringsometestingj#63hutdownmargin demonstrationsf"lollowing any refueling cycle.
Ref: WNP2 Systems - RPS
Ref: WNP2 Systems - RPS
                                                                                /
/
e l
e l
l l
6-10
6-10                                                           l l


6.11   (4.0)
6.11 (4.0)
Concerning the attached Figure 6.11 ( two pump power / core ficw operating map):
Concerning the attached Figure 6.11 ( two pump power / core ficw operating map):
(a) Identify the Natural Circulation Line               (0.25)
(a) Identify the Natural Circulation Line (0.25)
(b) What is the reason or basis for the Natural Circulation Line 7                         (0.75)
(b) What is the reason or basis for the Natural Circulation Line 7 (0.75)
(c) Identify the Twenty Four(24%) Percent PumpSpeedL1}ne._               -
(c) Identify the Twenty Four(24%) Percent PumpSpeedL1}ne._
(0.25)
(d) What is the reason or basis for the Twenty Four(24%) Percent Pump Speed Line?
(0.75)
(a) Identify the Constant Speed Lines.
(0.25)
(f) What is the reason or basis fer the Constant Speed Lines?
(0.75)
(g) Identify the Recirculation Pump Cavitation Line.
(0.25)
(0.25)
(d) What is the reason or basis for the Twenty Four(24%) Percent Pump Speed Line?          (0.75)
(h) What i= the resscn or basis f or the Recirculation Pump Cavitation line ?
(a) Identify the Constant Speed Lines.                  (0.25)
(0.75)
(f) What is the reason or basis fer the Constant Speed Lines?                              (0.75)
(g) Identify the Recirculation Pump Cavitation Line.                                    (0.25)
(h) What i= the resscn or basis f or the Recirculation Pump Cavitation line ?               (0.75)
(see Figure 6.11-KEY, for questions a,c,e,& g)
(see Figure 6.11-KEY, for questions a,c,e,& g)
(b) As power is increased by withdrawing control rods, care i           flow will increase due to natural circulation effects -
(b) As power is increased by withdrawing control rods, care i
flow will increase due to natural circulation effects -
hatter water and steam within the core shroud i s less dense than the subcooled water of the downcomer area.
hatter water and steam within the core shroud i s less dense than the subcooled water of the downcomer area.
This_effect will support a natural core flow that supplements forced circulation- occuring with or withcut forced circulation. Its effect is more pronounced at lower core flows due to less flow resistance at lower power levels.
This_effect will support a natural core flow that supplements forced circulation-occuring with or withcut forced circulation. Its effect is more pronounced at lower core flows due to less flow resistance at lower power levels.
(d) The 24% pump speed lines define core flow at varying power levels for MINIMUM pump speed.
(d) The 24% pump speed lines define core flow at varying power levels for MINIMUM pump speed.
(f) Defines the change in core flow ,with constant pump 6 N ^'" "*
(f) Defines the change in core flow,with constant pump 6 N ^'" "*
speed, due to rod pattern changes. Flow increases as Power is decreased (by inserting control rods) due to decreased channel flow resistance as steam production
speed, due to rod pattern changes. Flow increases as Power is decreased (by inserting control rods) due to decreased channel flow resistance as steam production
            . decreases.
. decreases.
(h) Defines the locus of power / flow conditions, below which cavitation of the recirculation pumps would occur.
(h) Defines the locus of power / flow conditions, below which cavitation of the recirculation pumps would occur.
Ref: WNP2 Systems - RFC 6-11
Ref: WNP2 Systems - RFC 6-11


                                                ;[' i ; ',-
;[' i ; ',-
Figure 6.11 120 WNP 3 iWO PUMP OPERAilON l
l Figure 6.11 120 WNP 3 iWO PUMP OPERAilON l
110   -                                                                                                              gC A
110 gC A
                                            .              100     -
100 8
8
~
                                                                    ~
7
,                                                                                                                                                              7     {
{
80   -                                                                                    6 E                                                                                        5 g 70        -
80 6
2                                                                                 4 g 60         -                                                              2 U                                                                 O l
l Eg 70 5
                                                                                                                          'g#                                                                 '
2 4
E 50 A.
g 60 2
                                                                                                                                          /
U O l E 50
                                                                                                                                /
'g#
                                                                                                                                      /
/
40 -
A.
y                             <
/
/
40 y
s 30
s 30
                                                                                                                                -~
-~
                                                                                                                              .' ~'N                                                       l 20   -    -
.' ~'N l
K
20 K
* 10 -
10
0      -              I                                     #                '            I   I       I   I     I -
[
0       10       20                                   30 R       40   ,
I I
50     60     70   80       90 100   110 PERCENT CORE FLOW TWO-PUMP TilERMAL POWER - CORE FLOW OPERATING MAP BASED ON:                                                                                                         . ass N Wess 190ig
I I
  ' ~
I I -
FSAR, APPENDIX 11, FIGURE 11.2.5-1
0 0
                                                                                                                                =                         -
10 20 30 R 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 PERCENT CORE FLOW TWO-PUMP TilERMAL POWER - CORE FLOW OPERATING MAP BASED ON:
. ass ess ig
~
N W 190 FSAR, APPENDIX 11, FIGURE 11.2.5-1
=


(' 's '
(' 's
                                  ~
~
Figure 6.11     KEY 120 WHP-3 TWO Pune OPEnATION N -JET PuuP HO22 E CAVai AllON LINE 110       -
Figure 6.11 KEY 120 WHP-3 TWO Pune OPEnATION N -JET PuuP HO22 E CAVai AllON LINE 110 s.xt euur sucisON eavsiAliON t Nc Lines 0-9 & A-C are BC
s .xt euur sucisON eavsiAliON t Nc                                 Lines 0-9 & A-C are           BC n.nccinc ruue caviiAliON tis 4E                               " Constant speed lines"         ^
^
v -VALVE cAViiAisON LW4E                                                                     9
n.nccinc ruue caviiAliON tis 4E
                                ,          100     -
" Constant speed lines" v -VALVE cAViiAisON LW4E 9
renctNi vALvt rossiiON FLOW COHinOL VALVE                                                           8 g      ,
100 renctNi vALvt rossiiON FLOW COHinOL VALVE 8
e               a nAlunAL cincuLAllON
e a nAlunAL cincuLAllON g
:                e 24% roue sesto soo 7
e 24% roue sesto 7
3                 8 100% PUMP SPEED
soo 3
_                                                                            g a               se 6                       e               as 5
8 100% PUMP SPEED g
3: 70       -
a se 6
                                                                ,              4,                                                                             y                       ,
e as 5
60   -
3: 70 4,
                                                                                "                      3p o                      *
y 60 3p 0)/ /
                                                                            '"                      0)/ /
o 6 60
* L 6 60       -
/
                                                                                                                  /                                   N
N L
                                                                                                            /
/
40   -
40 p
p                                    s 30   -                                                      -
s 30 R
R                ,f
,f
                                                                                                        -    ~%g V                 N 20   -
~%g V
Ny  N                 H 10   -
N 20 Ny H
S R
N 10 S
O                                  I                   -
R I
                                                                                                                      '              I     I     I   I       I O         10                   20             30 R       40 50     60     70   80     00   100     110 PERCENT CORE FLOW                                             .
I I
TWO-PUMP THERMAL POWER - CORE FLOW OPERATING MAP                                                                                         .
I I
I
I O
                                  ~
O 10 20 30 R 40 50 60 70 80 00 100 110 PERCENT CORE FLOW TWO-PUMP THERMAL POWER - CORE FLOW OPERATING MAP I
                              .                  DASED OH:                                                                                                     assess.th FSAR, APPENDIX 11,                                                                                         'I!OV'88b FIGURE 11.2.51                                                         :
~
DASED OH:
assess.th FSAR, APPENDIX 11,
'I!OV'88b FIGURE 11.2.51


6.12         (0.5)
6.12 (0.5)
Following a reactor scram, the four rod display position goes blank, and the green full-in light on the full core
Following a reactor scram, the four rod display position goes blank, and the green full-in light on the full core display for the selected control rod is lighted.
.                          display for the selected control rod is lighted.
]
]
Is this normal indication for the RMCS (YES or NO) ?
Is this normal indication for the RMCS (YES or NO) ?
Line 1,607: Line 2,326:
6-12
6-12


4 6.13     (1.0)
4 6.13 (1.0)
The shutdown cooling made of the RHR system is isolated at 125 psig.
The shutdown cooling made of the RHR system is isolated at 125 psig.
What is the reason or basis for this isolation?
What is the reason or basis for this isolation?
To protect the RHR pumps from exceeding their design Saturation Temperature (360 degrees F.) for 135 psig.
To protect the RHR pumps from exceeding their design Saturation Temperature (360 degrees F.) for 135 psig.
Ref: WNP2 Systems - Nuclear Boiler Instruinentation j                                     END OF SECTION 6.0
Ref: WNP2 Systems - Nuclear Boiler Instruinentation j
                  * * * *
END OF SECTION 6.0
* * * *
* m *
* m *
* m
* m
Line 1,620: Line 2,340:
* m *-* m 4
* m *-* m 4
1 0
1 0
,                                            6-13
6-13


SECTION 7.0 Procedures - Normal, Abnormal, Emergency, and Radiological Control 7.1   (2.0)
SECTION 7.0 Procedures - Normal, Abnormal, Emergency, and Radiological Control 7.1 (2.0)
What is the reason or bases for NOT starting more than two(2) circ water pumps while SM1,2,& 3 are being supplied by startup transformer TR-S ,upon Plant Startup?
What is the reason or bases for NOT starting more than two(2) circ water pumps while SM1,2,& 3 are being supplied by startup transformer TR-S,upon Plant Startup?
An undervoltage or degraded voltage on TR-S will occur upon the start of the third circ water pump.
An undervoltage or degraded voltage on TR-S will occur upon the start of the third circ water pump.
Ref: PPM 3.1.2,     Plant Startup 4
Ref: PPM 3.1.2, Plant Startup 4
r 4
r 4
7-1
7-1


7.2         (2.0)
7.2 (2.0)
State four(4) of the five(5) items logged at the time of criticality, required by PPM 3.1.2 - Plant Startup.
State four(4) of the five(5) items logged at the time of criticality, required by PPM 3.1.2 - Plant Startup.
(0.5 pts each) i                       (Any 4 of the following)
(0.5 pts each) i (Any 4 of the following)
(a) Time                                                               .
(a) Time
                        - (b) Control Rod Position (c) Neutron level (d) Reactor period (e) Reactor coolant temperature I
- (b) Control Rod Position (c) Neutron level (d) Reactor period (e) Reactor coolant temperature I
Ref: PFi-i 3.1. 2 Pl en t Star tup i
Ref: PFi-i 3.1. 2 Pl en t Star tup i
J r
J r
Line 1,640: Line 2,360:
7-2
7-2


7.3   (3.0)
7.3 (3.0)
Concerning the MINIMUM REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEMPERATURE VERSUS REACTOR VESSEL PRESSURE curves (attached figures 7.3.a and 7.3.b). The RCS temperature and pressure shall be limited in accordance with the limit curves A and A*, B and B*, C and C' for different plant     conditions associated with these curves.
Concerning the MINIMUM REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEMPERATURE VERSUS REACTOR VESSEL PRESSURE curves (attached figures 7.3.a and 7.3.b). The RCS temperature and pressure shall be limited in accordance with the limit curves A and A*,
What are the plant conditions and/or evolutions applicable to each of the three (3) limit curve sets A and A*, B and B', C and C',respectively ? (Temperature limits are NOT necessary) ( 1.0 pt. for each )
B and B*, C and C' for different plant conditions associated with these curves.
What are the plant conditions and/or evolutions applicable to each of the three (3) limit curve sets A and A*,
B and B', C and C',respectively ? (Temperature limits are NOT necessary) ( 1.0 pt. for each )
( can be in any order )
( can be in any order )
(a) A-A'; Hydrostatic or leak testing (b) B-B'; for heatup by Non-nuclear means,Cooldoen following a nuclear shutdown, and low power physi-: tests (c) C-C'; for nonrations with a critical core ( otner than low power physics tests)
(a) A-A'; Hydrostatic or leak testing (b) B-B'; for heatup by Non-nuclear means,Cooldoen following a nuclear shutdown, and low power physi-: tests (c) C-C'; for nonrations with a critical core ( otner than low power physics tests)
Ref: Technical Specifications 7-3
Ref: Technical Specifications 7-3


Figure 7.3 .a A   '5         C
Figure 7.3.a A
                                                                          ^
'5 C
                          .      I                                               If       ~h     l   I           l l
I If
Il .I y
~h l
                                                                                                                                                                                              ~
I l
i               l                               ll         fl   I   1.         l       l Il           l I       I       1 Q I;             l   l   l           l             1             II           I
l Il.I y
                        ,        i      l       l'              I       :
^
l    6I                              I       I       I            Il           I                       Q l                     }l                   l   I M ecam                                           '
i l
I                         :':'
ll fl I
17iilI
1.
                                                                                                                                                                                        ~
l l
I           l                     /         i         ~l     i   Il         l l             I     li       ll             I           III                                                             I I   I       I     -1         11           I     I     I   I   I     I     '.
Il l
                                                                                                                                          ~
~
I I              J               l               l   I         ,_
I I
l L                 II                     /                 I               II                                                         I i                         I
1 Q I; l
                                                            /                   I           II IIl                               .'            .      ,      I j ,,,         I             I     /I                       I           II I lAl                     I     I             l     l     l
l l
                                                                                                                                                                                      ~
l 1
i             i   i       I/                       I                     II AII                                         I           I i             ll           If       I               l     l   L       l   l   R6"l                 I     l             l     l     1
II I
                      !            I   l       l       l                 Il   l il I hl                   I l       l     l             l     l     l i,           I   I       I       I                       I ll LVI                         I       I     I       I     I     I     1 s             i   l         l               '/i il 81l                                       l       l     l             l     1i
l 6I I
                      !2            ll           l ll       I/, F           l   I'           l       I     I l     l       l 7~ ~
I I
                  .                  III                             Ill RIIl                                       l             I             III
Il I
            ~
Q i
                            ,        I   I       I                IL icP                   l   I   I           I       I     i       i     l     i     i l   l       l'           / IbdiII                                           I       I     !              Il           l                                       l l          /             MI                   I   llI                 i     l             l     l      l l
l l'
l           l     /               /       I     ,
I l
II       l     l     l       l     l             l     l     l-
}l l I M ecam I
                                                                      '/l
I l
          ~
/
                            ,,,        II           l /                            i          II        l     l     l       l     l             l     l     l l   l       l      Ill                     l           II       l l     l       l     1             1II                     -
i
l                    VL                           ll     l   l     l         l       l     1             III I1 6 Ii         l   l   l             l       l     l             l     l     1
~l i
                              ,        I   I       I   .I           I       I     I           I   I   III                   I     I-           1I           i                                     ,
Il l 17iilI
o                       too                           nos                   aos                           e                       a                                   ]
~
umamuu asacron vcssa, me7As. Tsursmarune (+r)
l I
      -l                                                                                                                                                                                               1 h                                           MINIMUM REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEMPERATURE VERSUS                                                                                                       l
li ll I
                                                      .REACTCR VESSEL PRESSURE (INITIAL VALUES)
III I
WASHINGTON NUCLEAR - UNIT 2                                           3/4 4-20                                                                                           ,. ;
I I
I
-1 11 I
I I
I I
I I
I J
l l
I
~
l L
II
/
I II I
i I
' /
I II IIl I
j,,,
I I
/I I
II I
lAl I
I l
l l
~
i i
i I/
I II AII I
I i
ll If I
l l
L l
l R6"l I
l l
l 1
I l
l l
Il l il I hl I
l l
l l
l l
i, I
I I
I I ll LVI I
I I
I I
I 1
s i
l l
'/i il 81l l
l l
l 1i ll l
ll I/, F l
I' l
I I
l l
l 7~ ~
2 III Ill RIIl l
I III I
I I
IL icP l
I I
I I
i i
l i
i
~
l l
l'
/ IbdiII I
I Il l
l
/
MI I
llI i
l l
l l
l l
/
/
I II l
l l
l l
l l
l-II l /
'/l i
II l
l l
l l
l l
l
~
l l
l Ill l
II l
l l
l 1
1II l
VL ll l
l l
l l
1 III I1 6 Ii l
l l
l l
l l
l 1
I I
I
.I I
I I
I I III I
I-1I i
]
o too nos aos e
a umamuu asacron vcssa, me7As. Tsursmarune (+r)
*-l h
MINIMUM REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEMPERATURE VERSUS
.REACTCR VESSEL PRESSURE (INITIAL VALUES)
WASHINGTON NUCLEAR - UNIT 2 3/4 4-20


Figure 7.3                     .b A'           n*     c' l                                       IIf                             I               l           l   l
Figure 7.3
    ..%.                              I:   l                           l     l                       /                     I   I           I           I     I S                                                                                   i             fI         I           I   l-                           l I                         l/                           I     I           I   l'                 I   I     I Il-
.b A'
                                                                                                ~
n*
I    l~ l                                                           l      l      ',
c' l
iJedohJ                     l     !
IIf I
                                                                                                                                                                            ?
l l
MtV
l I:
                                                                                                                                                                            ~~
l l
l                              I                                                          il          l    I 1                 I       /               ll           F             I ai s,,- s % I                     i
l
                        '"            l   1     .I             I     I       f               /l Il i                       I   in # a'ah*a                   -
/
l            I                       /               /           'I     I         I   I""i""i"''i"'I''
I I
i               l             I                       /               lli                 I     'l l   II                 II; I                 I           I                     /               f!/                   I                                       I!                     -
I I
ll
I S
              ~
i fI I
j ,,,             I           I             m/                   )                         i         I   I           I       I   I     i W
I l-l I
                      ;                I           I                               / Il                         l           l   l           l     l   l     !
l/
                      !                I    I                     TPAJ 'l                                       I           i   !            I           i     !
I I
                    .l                 I     I     I         / IMD, /                                   I     I               i           l           I     i 3,               !    I       I       /l       I     /f//l                               l           I   !          i       l   I     i
I l'
: 5.               IIIf                               /             ffd             l     I           Iii                     lI!
I I
                      !                III                           '/             /                 ,I                   I   I           i       I   i     I III                     I/             /                 1%I                       l   l           ,      III
I I
                            ,            I   I      i           1/         /                     I     r'A l             i   I               I I   I       !
l~ l Il-
I           I         /           /l                     Il l                     l     l                 l           l
~
                .                        I           i       / /                                           II                 Iii                     ll         l
l l
                                                              /       /                                           I           I   i         i       lIi
', iJedohJ l
                            "            iI              /       I/I                                       I                 i   l           l       l   l     !
?
!                                        l I                                                   I         I   .
l I
i      1 I               'fl           c!2I'"                             l       I         i     i         I       I   I       :                l l   l          /             17                           l                               l                 l   l       i                 l
MtV il l
                                                                    ;                                                                I                             i I     i      I                 I                           !                          I               I     I   I
I
                                ,                                                                                                                                                      l o.,                       too .                       200                               soo                       ao                 soo             ;
~~
          -i                                                   umiuuu nEAcTen vEssa utTM. TE.WERATUnt (*F)
1 I
                                                    !iitlIttN REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEM.PERATURE VERSUS
/
                                                  , REACTOR V253EL FRE55URE (OFERATIONAL VALUES)
ll F
        ..              'JASHIttGTON NUCLEAR - UNIT 2                                               3/4 4-21
I ai s,,- s % I i
l 1
.I I
I f
/l Il i I
in # a'ah*a l
I
/
/
'I I
I I""i""i"''i"'I''
i l
I
/
lli I
'l l
II II; I
I I
/
f!/
I I!
~
j,,,
I I
m/
)
ll i
I I
I I
I i
I I
W
/
Il l
l l
l l
l I
I TPAJ
'l I
i I
i
.l I
I I
/ IMD,
/
I I
i l
I i
3, I
I
/l I
/f//l l
I i
l I
i 5.
IIIf
/
ffd l
I Iii lI!
III
'/
/
,I I
I i
I i
I III I/
/
1%I l
l III I
I i
1/
/
I r'A l i
I I
I I
I I
/
/l Il l
l l
l l
I i
/
/
II Iii ll l
/
/
I I
i i
lIi iI
/
I/I I
i l
l l
l l
I I
I i
1 I
'fl c!2I'"
l I
i i
I I
I l
l
/
17 l
l l
l i
I i
I I
I I
I I
I i
o.,
too.
200 soo ao soo
-i umiuuu nEAcTen vEssa utTM. TE.WERATUnt (*F)
!iitlIttN REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEM.PERATURE VERSUS
, REACTOR V253EL FRE55URE (OFERATIONAL VALUES)
'JASHIttGTON NUCLEAR - UNIT 2 3/4 4-21


7.4       (2.0)
7.4 (2.0)
If any of the RCS Pressure / Temperature limits are exceeded (limit curves shown on figures 7.3.a&b) , What ACTION is required per Technical Specifications ?
If any of the RCS Pressure / Temperature limits are exceeded (limit curves shown on figures 7.3.a&b), What ACTION is required per Technical Specifications ?
Restore the temperature and/or pressure to within the limits within 30 minutes; perform an engineering evaluation to determine the effects of the out-of-limit condition on structural integrity of the RCS; determine that the RCS remains acceptable for continued operations-Ref: Technical Specifications
Restore the temperature and/or pressure to within the limits within 30 minutes; perform an engineering evaluation to determine the effects of the out-of-limit condition on structural integrity of the RCS; determine that the RCS remains acceptable for continued operations-Ref: Technical Specifications
  ~
~
i 1
i i
i                                                                              i 7-4
i 7-4


j 7.5   (3.0)
j 7.5 (3.0)
In accordance with 10 CFR 20, " Standards for Protection against Radiation":
In accordance with 10 CFR 20, " Standards for Protection against Radiation":
(a) What are the Radiation Dose Standards for individuals in restricted areas per calender quarter?                                       (1.5)
(a) What are the Radiation Dose Standards for individuals in restricted areas per calender quarter?
(b) What are the three requirements that must be met if the Whole Body limits for a calender quarter are to be exceeded?                             (1.5)
(1.5)
(a) (0.5 ots. each) 1.25 Rem - Whole Body (head & trunk, active blood forming organs, lens of eyes, gonads) 18.75 Rem - Hands & Forearms; Feet & Ankles                   ,
(b) What are the three requirements that must be met if the Whole Body limits for a calender quarter are to be exceeded?
7.5 Rem - Skin of Whole Body (b) (0.5 pts, each) 3.0 Rem per calender quarter - MAXIMUM 5*(N-18) total accumulated done to the whole body, Where N is the individual age in years at his last birthday.
(1.5)
(a) (0.5 ots. each) 1.25 Rem - Whole Body (head & trunk, active blood forming organs, lens of eyes, gonads) 18.75 Rem - Hands & Forearms; Feet & Ankles 7.5 Rem - Skin of Whole Body (b) (0.5 pts, each) 3.0 Rem per calender quarter - MAXIMUM 5*(N-18) total accumulated done to the whole body, Where N is the individual age in years at his last birthday.
Form NRC -4 or equivalent.
Form NRC -4 or equivalent.
Ref: 10 CFR 20 J
Ref: 10 CFR 20 J
7-5
7-5


7.6   (3.0)
7.6 (3.0)
A LOCA has occured and a high temperature steam enviornment exists in the drywell. EXPLAIN why the drywell sprays must NOT be initiated if containment conditions exist such that the UNSAFE region of attached figure 7.6 (DRYWELL SPRAY INITIAlION PRESSURE LIMIT) is entered.
A LOCA has occured and a high temperature steam enviornment exists in the drywell. EXPLAIN why the drywell sprays must NOT be initiated if containment conditions exist such that the UNSAFE region of attached figure 7.6 (DRYWELL SPRAY INITIAlION PRESSURE LIMIT) is entered.
Spray initiation above this limit may (through the combined effects of evaporative and convective cooling) result in a containment _degressurization rate which exceeds the relief gra#N % city of the7. F . Lu D.W. vacuum breakers. As a result, containment negative design pressure may be exceeded, i           leading to containment failure.
Spray initiation above this limit may (through the combined effects of evaporative and convective cooling) result in a containment _degressurization rate which exceeds the relief N
Ref: EPG's,                                                 ,
gra#
General Electric- Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals e
% city of the7. F. Lu D.W.
vacuum breakers. As a result, containment negative design pressure may be exceeded, i
leading to containment failure.
Ref: EPG's, General Electric-Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals e
i l
i l
7-6
7-6


eu
eu rigure 7.6 DRYWELL SPRAY INITIATION PRESSURE LIMIT 250 ZOki% NWRD?
          ,                                                rigure 7.6                                                                     ,
<&,:t :: #p
DRYWELL SPRAY INITIATION PRESSURE LIMIT 250 ZOki%                   NWRD?                     <&,:t ::             #p             .8%:df?               :it4 g         a+;,m.m.         *
.8%:df? :it4 g a+;,m.m. /
                                                                                                                                                                                  /
U".yth:;
240
^#
                                                *                                            #          U".yth:;                     ^#                             ''        '
240 w,k,;g,y$?.Nsi 9.3,g#klCh. -,
                                                              - - .                ,,y,.                    v.....-...   .. -
Nk;e,,.c.m[f.:
                                                        ! Y, k;;;, . . : .
! Y, k;;;,.. :.
Nk;eM ,,.c.m[f.:      . .,h.;9.i.d2i..i*f[y:'
..,h.;9.i.d2i..i*f[y:'
Y I'(g-k.W:gisy;
,,y,.
                                                                                              ;q b5 ~*
v.....-...
r h Yk w,k,;g,y$?
bI SNS -..
bI SNS
I'(g-k.W:gisy;,.-(^i.w.5M.,p;j[.
                                                                                                          ,.-(^i.w.5M.,p;j[.                     - .Nsi 9.3,g#klCh . -,
Y b5 ~* 4.
                                                                                                                                          - ..$'i'.$>$N. ''
;q r h Yk
_          #                                                  4.                      ;a
'i'.$>$N.
                                        .-(       g       .;              ' A     'X
M
: e. .       >                  h      [.
;a
.-(
g
' A
'X e.
h
[.
' $4:7. < S'i'3.d'b'^2_SiISM<* $$?Iih,,,@T[N 3
f.
f.
44'O
44'O
                                  ' $4:7. < S'i'3.d'b'^2_SiISM<*
" Y tj
                                                                                                        $$?Iih, , ,@T[N                                      3 tj
~
                                                ~
:-Ds y.
:. ,v    :-Ds
:.,v p-.s -
: y.   $
c.ir ya-wX
p-.s -
.+:.e;k #.::s;i!m s W'Ni:
                                                                                                            " Y c.ir ya-wX
Nh+'2e>?
                                  .w.                                     9Yi'-3;e                        !4.'YR $UY
v'(:386: -
                                  . e # .::s;i!m s
!4.'YR $UY
                                  .+:.e;k                                            k.
.w.
r                                                                W'Ni: Nh+'2e>?   v'(:386:
9Yi'-3;e k.
f       -
. e r
                      < 200
f
              ,      E          TE$.48' 1                        ETJS M.e;ee-960                              P
< 200 TE$.48' ETJS
* g          .:s:<         :.gl.M.isy.m$6                       w:                ;
.:s:< :.gl.M.isy.m$6 M.e;ee-960 P
2          ,w!                                          wws:s                                                                                                                      )
E 1
          .          g  no
g w:
                                ###w, <+;.p;;3#         "'                        MM e
2
w
###w, <+;.p;;3# MM
                                                        ..                        o.:
)
g            g w%g
,w!
                                +5.         . . 17$        .fim:<
wws:s g
                                                                          @m:.,67, g           W!Nid((lII:(43%<
no e
                                    'w2-:1 9pv .f                                         [s-'l I           'wwc    +
g w%g 17$ @ 6 7
+5...
.fim:< m:.,
o.:
w g
W!Nid((lII:(43%< [s-'l
'w2-:1 9pv.f g
'wwc I
's%1' N.~if.
hyw
hyw
                                's%1'  "WN.~if.        ",  x
+
                . O lf$'bN'h:
x O
M          $;<N<Mk.           j.
"W lf$'bN'h:
w                    -v i.
$;<N<Mk. j.
                    .          $$/                                                       -
Mw
m         .w ::S..e:
-v i.
$$/
.m
::S..e:
.w.
4 '.
4 '.
120                                                                     -
120 xT.'.
xT O
100 I
100                                                                                                                             I                                                             *
O 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 SUPPRESSION CHAMBER PRESSURE (PSIG) 1 O
                  ,        15                 20                             25                   30               35                 40             45                   50 SUPPRESSION CHAMBER PRESSURE (PSIG)
                                                                  -                                                                                                                                                          1 O
l
l


3 7.7   (2.0)
3 7.7 (2.0)
Define ADEQUATE CORE COOLING, as used in the Emergency Procedures.
Define ADEQUATE CORE COOLING, as used in the Emergency Procedures.
Heat removal from the reactor sufficient to restore and maintain peak fuel cladding temperature below 2200 degrees F.
Heat removal from the reactor sufficient to restore and maintain peak fuel cladding temperature below 2200 degrees F.
                                              -oK-Ref: EPG's, General Electric- Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals
-oK-Ref: EPG's, General Electric-Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals s,
                                - - ~ - -       s,      x    c, C o d t s.s. g g y ,*
x
[   h d           V       -s
- - ~ - -
                                                              ) -j                         *
c, C o d t s.s. g g y,*
                                                          '/
[
                                          ~
h d V
(J/                                                           Jf. M cd                       [dd)& y_
)
                            @ -M. , _           =  c .j   =
-j
                                                      - -- y [,, y a -                   _,
-s (J/
I i
~
'/
Jf. M cd
[dd)& y_
@ -M., _
c.j =
[,, y a -
=
- -- y i
e 7-7
e 7-7


7.8   (4.0)
7.8 (4.0)
State four(4) of the five(5) " entry conditions" for RPV Level Control (RPV/L),per the Emergency Procedures. (include all associated setpoints)   (1.0 pts. each)
State four(4) of the five(5) " entry conditions" for RPV Level Control (RPV/L),per the Emergency Procedures. (include all associated setpoints)
(1.0 pts. each)
(any four of the following)
(any four of the following)
(a) RPV Water Level below + 13.0 in.
(a) RPV Water Level below + 13.0 in.
(b) RPV pressure above 1037 psig (c) Drywell pressure above 1.65 psig (d) A condition which requires MSIV isolation (c) A condition which requires a scram and power is above.57.
(b) RPV pressure above 1037 psig (c) Drywell pressure above 1.65 psig (d) A condition which requires MSIV isolation (c) A condition which requires a scram and power is above.57.
or cannot be determined.
or cannot be determined.
Ref: Emergency Procedures                                     ,
Ref: Emergency Procedures 1
1 I
I
                                                                    +
+
7-8
7-8


7.9   (4.0)
7.9 (4.0)
State four(4) of the five(5) systems / components listed in PPM 5.4.1, Station Blackout, which when lost constitute initiation of the Station Blackout Emergency Procedure.
State four(4) of the five(5) systems / components listed in PPM 5.4.1, Station Blackout, which when lost constitute initiation of the Station Blackout Emergency Procedure.
( One pt. each )
( One pt. each )
      .(any four of the fc11owing five)
.(any four of the fc11owing five)
(a) Offsite 230 KV startup power (b) Offsite 115 KV backup power (c) Diesel Generator # 1 (d) Diesel Generator #2 (e) HPCS Diesel Generator i
(a) Offsite 230 KV startup power (b) Offsite 115 KV backup power (c) Diesel Generator # 1 (d) Diesel Generator #2 (e) HPCS Diesel Generator i
Ref: Emergency Procedures, PPM G.4.1 END OF SECTION 7.0 7-9
Ref: Emergency Procedures, PPM G.4.1 END OF SECTION 7.0 7-9


SECTION 8.0 Adminestrative Procedures, Conditions and Limitations 8.1   (3.0)
SECTION 8.0 Adminestrative Procedures, Conditions and Limitations 8.1 (3.0)
What is the reason or basis that Technical Specifications requires you restore Suppression Pool (SP) water temperature to below 90 degrees F within twenty-four hours, under power operating conditions?
What is the reason or basis that Technical Specifications requires you restore Suppression Pool (SP) water temperature to below 90 degrees F within twenty-four hours, under power operating conditions?
j Blowdown from an initial SP water temperature of 90 degrees F results in a water temperature of about 135 degrees F.
j Blowdown from an initial SP water temperature of 90 degrees F results in a water temperature of about 135 degrees F.
This is below analyzed temperatures required for con.plete condensation, and ensures adequa,te,ayai_1qble,NPSij {ce_both the RHR and Core Spray pumps [}Therefore, operator action to /L'#
This is below analyzed temperatures required for con.plete condensation, and ensures adequa,te,ayai_1qble,NPSij {ce_both the RHR and Core Spray pumps [}Therefore, operator action to /L'#
maintain SP temperature within the specified limits ensures cec # 4"   ;
maintain SP temperature within the specified limits ensures cec # "
that containment integrity will be maintained fcr all g '
4 that containment integrity will be maintained fcr all g '
analyzed accidents.                               "~
"~
analyzed accidents.
fy sn rany Ref: Technical Specifications 1
fy sn rany Ref: Technical Specifications 1
l 1
1
                                                                            ~     -
~
k G-1                                    I 1
k G-1


l 8.2 (2.0)
8.2 (2.0)
State two times when the Control Room Operator has the authority and responsibility to initiate a reactor plant shutdown. ( 1.0 pt. each )
State two times when the Control Room Operator has the authority and responsibility to initiate a reactor plant shutdown. ( 1.0 pt. each )
(a) When the CRO determinen that the safety of the Reactor is in jeopardy.
(a) When the CRO determinen that the safety of the Reactor is in jeopardy.
(b) When operating parameters exceed any of the reactor protection circuit setpoints AND an automatic shutdown does not occur.
(b) When operating parameters exceed any of the reactor protection circuit setpoints AND an automatic shutdown does not occur.
Ref: PPM-1.3.1, Standing Operating Orders i                                                                       i I
Ref: PPM-1.3.1, Standing Operating Orders i
                                                                            ~
i I
l r
l
l s
~
8-2
r l
          .                        _          . ~ _ _ . . . _ . -
s 8-2
. ~


t 8.3   (2.0) t Concerning the FUEL CLADDING INTEGRITY safety limits:
t 8.3 (2.0) t Concerning the FUEL CLADDING INTEGRITY safety limits:
a Overheating of the fuel cladding ts prevented by...
a Overheating of the fuel cladding ts prevented by...
ESELECT THE TWO(2) CORRECT STATEMENTS, listed below- 1.0 pt.each]
ESELECT THE TWO(2) CORRECT STATEMENTS, listed below-1.0 pt.each]
(a) restricting fuel power operation such that the reactor coolant never reaches saturated conditions.
(a) restricting fuel power operation such that the reactor coolant never reaches saturated conditions.
(b) restricting fuel power operation to within the nucleate boiling regime.
(b) restricting fuel power operation to within the nucleate boiling regime.
(c) establishing a safety limit such that MCPR is not LESS THAN 1.06 for two(2) recirc. loop operation.
(c) establishing a safety limit such that MCPR is not LESS THAN 1.06 for two(2) recirc. loop operation.
(d) establishing a safety limit such that MCPR is not MORE THAN 1.06 for two(2) recirc. loop operation.
(d) establishing a safety limit such that MCPR is not MORE THAN 1.06 for two(2) recirc. loop operation.
(b)                                                           ,
(b)
(c)
(c)
Ref: Technical Specifications 9
Ref: Technical Specifications 9
Line 1,870: Line 2,860:
a
a


e 8.4   (3.5)
e 8.4 (3.5)
What are the minimun requirements for rotating shift crew size in operational modes 1,2,   or 3, per Technical Specifications (include the position, number. of personnel for each position, type of license required) ?
What are the minimun requirements for rotating shift crew size in operational modes 1,2, or 3, per Technical Specifications (include the position, number. of personnel for each position, type of license required) ?
(0.5 pts, each)
(0.5 pts, each)
(a) Shift Manager (SRO License on WNP2) - 1 (b) Control Room Supervisor (SRO License on WNP2)   -1 (c) Reactor Operator ( Operator License on WNP2)   -2 (d) Equipment Operator - 2 (e) Shift Technical Advisor - 1 (f) Health Physics Technician - 1 (g) Fire brigade members - 5 (not to include the Shift Supervisor, STA, nor three other members of the minimum shift crew necessary for safe plant shutdown and any personnel required for other essential functions during a fire emergency)
(a) Shift Manager (SRO License on WNP2) - 1 (b) Control Room Supervisor (SRO License on WNP2)
-1 (c) Reactor Operator ( Operator License on WNP2)
-2 (d) Equipment Operator - 2 (e) Shift Technical Advisor - 1 (f) Health Physics Technician - 1 (g) Fire brigade members - 5 (not to include the Shift Supervisor, STA, nor three other members of the minimum shift crew necessary for safe plant shutdown and any personnel required for other essential functions during a fire emergency)
Ref: Technical Specifications, PPM 1.3.2 - Shift Compliment and Functions 8-4
Ref: Technical Specifications, PPM 1.3.2 - Shift Compliment and Functions 8-4


o   .
o B.5 (1.5)
B.5   (1.5)
How are the following controlled keys maintained when not required for normal operation ? (Indicate the storage location and WHO controls these key sets)
How are the following controlled keys maintained when not     .
required for normal operation ? (Indicate the storage location and WHO controls these key sets)
(0.5 pts. each)
(0.5 pts. each)
(a) Bypass and Interlock keys (b) Control Room Panel Door keys (c) Miscellaneous keys (a) Control Room (Separate lockable cabinet) controlled by SM/CRSk''
(a) Bypass and Interlock keys (b) Control Room Panel Door keys (c) Miscellaneous keys lockable cabinet) controlled by (a) Control Room (Separate SM/CRSk''
(b) Control Room (Separatelockablecabinet)controlledby SM/CRSF''
(Separatelockablecabinet)controlledby (b) Control Room SM/CRSF''
(c) Radwaste Control Room (Separate lockable cabinet controlled by the Shift Support Superviserk/-
(c) Radwaste Control Room (Separate lockable cabinet controlled by the Shift Support Superviserk/-
PPM 1.3.23 - Adminestrative control of plant operating keys O
PPM 1.3.23 - Adminestrative control of plant operating keys O
8-5
8-5


8.6   (3.0)
8.6 (3.0)
Concerning the control of overtime, per PPM-1.3.27 " OVERTIME CONTROL":
Concerning the control of overtime, per PPM-1.3.27 " OVERTIME CONTROL":
(1.0 pt. each)
(1.0 pt. each)
(a) What is the longest period of consecutive hours that an individual may be scheduled to work (excluding shift turnover time)?
(a) What is the longest period of consecutive hours that an individual may be scheduled to work (excluding shift turnover time)?
        .(b) What is the maximum number of hours that an individual may work in a 48 hour period (excluding shift turnover time)?
.(b) What is the maximum number of hours that an individual may work in a 48 hour period (excluding shift turnover time)?
(c) What is the minimum break time required between work periods, including shift turnover time?
(c) What is the minimum break time required between work periods, including shift turnover time?
(a) 16 hours (b) 24 hours                                                 ,
(a) 16 hours (b) 24 hours (c) 8 hours Ref: PPM.1.3.27 - Overtime Control
(c) 8   hours Ref: PPM .1.3.27 - Overtime Control l
)
l l
                                                                          )
l 8-6
l 8-6


=
=
I 8.7   (3.0)
I 8.7 (3.0)
Per 10 CFR 55, " Operator Licenses" (1.0 each)
Per 10 CFR 55, " Operator Licenses" (1.0 each)
(a) The " Exemptions from Licenses" provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR 55), allow what individuals to operate the reactor controls without a license?
(a) The " Exemptions from Licenses" provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR 55), allow what individuals to operate the reactor controls without a license?
Line 1,910: Line 2,898:
Ref: 10 CFR 55 9-7
Ref: 10 CFR 55 9-7


o   s 9
o s
8.8   (2.0)
9 8.8 (2.0)
Per 10 CFR 20, " Standards for Protection Against Radiation":
Per 10 CFR 20, " Standards for Protection Against Radiation":
(1.0 pt. each)
(1.0 pt. each)
Line 1,917: Line 2,905:
(b) What is a HIGH RADIATION AREA ?
(b) What is a HIGH RADIATION AREA ?
(a) Area (accessible to personnel) where a major part of the body could receive:
(a) Area (accessible to personnel) where a major part of the body could receive:
5 mrem in one hour             (0.5)
5 mrem in one hour (0.5)
                      -or-100 mrem in 5 days             (0.5)
-or-100 mrem in 5 days (0.5)
(b) Area (accessible to personnel) where a major part of the body could receive 100 mrem in i hour             (1.0)
(b) Area (accessible to personnel) where a major part of the body could receive 100 mrem in i hour (1.0)
Ref: 10 CFR 20 I
Ref: 10 CFR 20 i
I i
4 l
i 4
8-8
l l
l 8-8


O ''o 8.9 (3. 0)-
O
''o 8.9 (3. 0)-
Temporary changes to procedures as described by Technical Specification 6.8.3, may be made provided what three(3) criteria are met ?
Temporary changes to procedures as described by Technical Specification 6.8.3, may be made provided what three(3) criteria are met ?
(1.0 each)
(1.0 each)
Line 1,938: Line 2,925:
What is the basis or reason for maintaining a minimum water level of at least 22 feet over the top of the spent fuel storage pool racks and reactor pressure vessel flange, per Technical Specifications?
What is the basis or reason for maintaining a minimum water level of at least 22 feet over the top of the spent fuel storage pool racks and reactor pressure vessel flange, per Technical Specifications?
To ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove
To ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove
              .99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irradiated fuel assembly.
.99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irradiated fuel assembly.
Ref: Technical Specifications END OF SECTION 8.0 END OF EXAM
Ref: Technical Specifications END OF SECTION 8.0 END OF EXAM
              *++*********************************************************
*++*********************************************************
            \
\\
o G-10}}
o G-10}}

Latest revision as of 23:05, 6 December 2024

Exam Rept 50-397/OL-86-02 on 860811-14.Exam Results:One Senior Reactor Operator Candidate Failed Simulator Portion & One Senior Reactor Operator Candidate Failed Oral & Simulator Portions of Exam.Eight Candidates Passed
ML20206U738
Person / Time
Site: Columbia 
Issue date: 09/17/1986
From: Elin J, Meadows T
NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION V)
To:
Shared Package
ML20206U736 List:
References
50-397-OL-86-02, 50-397-OL-86-2, NUDOCS 8610080250
Download: ML20206U738 (108)


Text

,

.)

Enclosure (1)

U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION REGION V EXAMINATION REPORT Examination Report No.: 50-397/0L-86-02 i

Facility:

Washington Nuclear Project, WNP-2 Docket No.:

50-397 Facility License No.:

NPF-21 4

Examinations administered at Washington Nuclear Project, WNP-2, Richland, Washington Chief Examiner:

.CFM # N

>-er-Et-

~

Thomas R. Meadows Date Signed

'7 7[gG Approved by:

n O. Elin, Chief, Operations Section D6te Signed Summary:

Examinations on August 11-14, 1986.

4 Written ~and oral examinations were administered to five SRO candidates and i

five RO candidates. One SRO candidate failed the simulator-portion of the-exam, and one SRO candidate failed both the oral and simulator portions of j

the ex~am.

All of the remaining candidates passed.

1 4

2 l

4 i

1 8610080250 860919 PDR ADOCK 05000397 V

PDR

,~

REPORT DETAILS 1.

Examiners:

  • Thomas Meadows, RV John Hanek, INEL Merton Bishop, INEL
  • Chief Examiner 2.

Persons Attending the Exit Meeting:

T. Meadows, RV, Chief Examiner J. Baker, WNP-2, Assistant Plant Manager R. Corcoran, WNP-2, Plant Operations Manager J. Wyrick, WNP-2, License Training Manager M. Westergren, WNP-2, License Training Supervisor 3.

Written Examination and Facility Review:

Written examinations were administered to five SRO candidates and five RO candidates on August 11, 1986 in the facilities training building.

The facility staff reviewed the exams immediately upon their conclusion.

The comments made by the staff are attached. All comments were resolved.

Appropriate changes were made to the pplicable SRO and R0 exam keys prior to the grading of the exams.

4.

Operating Examinations:

No general training weaknesses were noted during oral examinations conducted August 12-14, 1986.

The plant specific simulator was found adequate to conduct comprehensive NRC exams. However, the simulators performance was marginal, requiring excessive time to complete exam scenarios. The Chief Examiner met with the facility training staff to develop specific objectives that will achieve more efficient simulator examinations. The facility staff committed to meet the intent of these objectives within the next 2 or 3 exam cycl.es.

I 5.

Exit Meeting:

On August 14, 1986, the Chief Examiner met with the licensee representatives listed in paragraph 2.

The marginal simulator performance, and appropriate improvement action noted in paragraph 4 was discussed.

l 1

.~

i ATTACHMENT 1 WNP-2 SRO-EXAM (AUGUST 11, 1986)

FACILITY COMMENTS /NRC RESOLUTIONS NOTE:

Facility comments were submitted on a copy of an exam key provided for this use.

This key is attached.

5.10 Comment:

Question is confusing in that the candidates are trained that MAPRAT is only a computer name for the thermal limit APLHGR.

Resolution: Comment not accepted. The candidate must know the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR in order to properly interpret the computer print out.

The answer key is in agreement with the reference provided and will stand as is.

6.5 Comment

This question is misleading - it implies that this is the preferred ECCS injection flow path. The question should have asked:

"What are two (2) conditions when this flow path is preferred?" The candidates will be confused about which-set of RHR valves your talking about:

RHR-V-42A. and B; LPCI injection j

or RHR-V 53A and BTRHR S/D cooling Resolution: Comment accepted; however, this question was accurates based on training material provided. Since the facility training staff has committed to upgrade their training material to accurately reflect actual system logic, the exam key will be modified to accept other possible answers concerning direct core ECCS injection for full credit.

6.10 Comment:

The answer key should be clarified such that any one of the following conditions would be. acceptable for full credit of the applicable portion of the answer:

(a) Initial core loading (b) SDM testing (c) Various testing during refueling Resolution: Comment accepted. This was the intent of the answer key. Subsequently, the answer key will be modified to emphasize this point.

o 6.11 Comment:

Question is slightly confusing in that some of these curves do not have a " reason or basis", but merely identify a given power / flow condition.

Resolution: Comment not accepted. The term " reason" adequately covers this contingency, and this question is consistent with the training material provided.

7.6

' Comment:

The answer should indicate that " negative design containment pressure" is the bottom line answer.

Resolution: Comment not accepted. This is the intent of the answer key, and is worth the majority of the available points; however, the candidate should mention somethla.; about containment vacuum breakers rince this is the reason

  • hat they were installed.

7.7 Comnent

Since " adequate core cooling" cannot be directly measured by the operator (cladding temperature 2200 degrees F.), he must " infer" adequate core cooling by the following methods:

(a) RPV level TAF (b) One ECCS injecting at full flow rate (c) Steam cooling of RPV in progress This is consistent with the reference material provided.

Resolution: Comment accepted. The answer key will be modified to include this other acceptable answer.

8.1 Comment

Answer key should specify the bottom line answer - one required for full credit.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Answer key will be clarified.

8.4 Comment

Parcs (f) and (g) of the answer key is not part of technical specifications shift manning table, therefore, should not be required for full credit.

Resolution:

Comment not accepted. The table requirements for shift manning are only part of the answer. The question clearly stated, "per technical specifications".

8.5 Comment

Identified areas of the key should not be required in the answer.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. This was the intent of the key. The i

answer key will be corrected to clarify this intent.

l

ATTACHMENT 2 FACILITY COMMENTS /NRC RESOLUTIONS WNP R0 EXAM GIVEN ON

' AUGUST 11, 1986 J

NOTE: Facility comments were submitted on a copy of an exam key provided for this use. This key is attached.

1.04 Comment:

The word physical may confuse candidates.

Could possibly get answers pertaining to " physical" properties (FW pump, fission product buildup, core' aging effects, core flow, etc).

Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Question specifically asks for fuel characteristics with increasing fuel temperature that' contribute to a negative doppler co-efficient.

Answer key is correct in this-regard.

1.11 Comment:

Question is confusing, MAPRAT is only a computer name for the thermal limits APLHGR. Also MAPRAT is always maintained 1 1.0 not > 1.0.

a.

Could get > 1,0 depending on how the question is read.

b.

Or MAPRAT is the computer calculation used to identify where the APLHGR thermal limit may be exceeded.

Resolution: Comment accepted; Question 1.11 facility comment is valid MAPRAT is not a thermal limit, and is always maintained

$ 1.0.

Answer 1.11a will be changed to < 1.0.

Answer 1.11b facility comment is valid. Question 4

specifically asks for the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR, additional facility answer will be accepted.

1.16 Comment:

Additional answers for recirculation flow, (FCW position, pump speed) reactor power (rod position) FW temp (FW heater lineup) should be included in answer key.

Resolution: Comment accepted.

Facility comment is valid additional answers will be added to the answer key.

2 1

2.02b Comment:

The following statement (flux shapes at the end of cycle are such that the) should not be required for full credit.

Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This answer is verbatim from the recirculation system lesson plan. The important concept and key phrase here is " flux shapes." End of cycle was already stated in the question and is included only for sentence structure.

2.02c Comment:

Technical Specification Table 3.3.4. 2-1 note (b) states this function shall be automatically bypassed when turbine first stage pressure is less than or equal to 165 psig equivalent to thermal power less than 30% of rated thermal power.

(142 psig also accepted)

Resolution: Comment accepted. Technical Specification Table 3.3.4.2-1 note (b) is correct for this answer. Answer key was taken from reactor recirculation lesson plan page 31.

Also, annunciator response procedures 4.603.A7-5.4 and 4.603.A8-5.4 give setpoints of less than 30% equivalent reactor power and 1st stage pressure less than 108.5 psig.

The answer key will be changed to <165 psig (or <145 psig)

Ist stage pressure or <30% rated thermal power.

f 2.09 Comment:

Answer key is vague as to point breakdown / assignment.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept credit for system operational function.

2.10a Comment:

Question referenced PPM 5.1.3, procedure answer was as stated in lesson plan for SLC.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Answer key will be changed to "If the reactor cannot be shutdown [0.5] before suppression pool I

temperature reaches 110*F (0.5).

Point values will be adjusted as indicated. PPM 5.1.3 page 2 of 9 will be 1

included in reference.

2.11a Comment:

Off-gas glycol cooling system is not actually an off gas a

component.

i Resolution: Comment accepted.

2.11.a.13 will be deleted from the question and 2.11.a.10 from the answer key.

Point breakdown will be changed.

2.llb Comment:

CAS system is also used to " warm-up" the system.

Resolution: Comment accepted.

PPM 2.6.4 step 29 page 9 of 48 states

" Admit service air to the preheater selected for service by throttling open service air valve 06-V-4A(B) locally until 64 SCFM is indicated on SA-FI-67." Warmup the system will be included in the answer key.

i e

- - ~ -

c.

,~--c

3 3.01d Comment:

Two minute period should be nine minute period.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Reference, PPM 3.3.1 reactor scram indicates nine minute period is correct. Two minutes is an error in the system training manual. Answer key changed to nine minute period. PPM 3.3.1 reactor scram added to reference.

3.03c Comment:

How much droop is inserted is outside the scope of ES-202. Why droop inserted much more important. Exact number not necessary.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted.

3.04b Comment:

Answer should also include SRM > 100 cps.

Resolution:

Comment accepted.

SRM > 100 cps will be added to the answer.

3.05 Comment:

Fuel load dunking chambers are no longer used. Delete question and answer.

Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Technical Specification 3.9.2 allows the use of special movable detectors during I

core alterations in place of the normal SRM nuclear detectors.

3.07a Comment:

APRM FLOW BIAS OFF-NORMAL annunciator terminology may be confusing, actual name is APRM flow converter-INOP.

Resolution:

Facility comment noted but not accepted. Page 21 of the APRM systems training lesson plan describes this function ~

as the APRM FLOW BIAS OFF-NORMAL".

3.07c Comment:

Flow computer should be flow comparator.

Resolution:

Comment accepted.

Typographic error. Word computer changed to comparator in question 3.07.c.

3.07c Comment:

Question did not specifically ask for second part of answer, therefore, it should not be required for full credit.

Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. Question was specific in that it asked what would occur if " flow comparator A" was bypassed.

4 3.09b Comment:

Question did not specifically ask for second part of answer. Therefore, it should not be required for full credit.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Although the answer key is verbatim from the system training lesson plan, dead end is implied to mean a no flow condition.

Therefore, either answer will be accepted for full credit.

3.11 Comment:

Recirculation flow controllers are not operated in auto, thus part a.1 is not really applicable.

There was no reference supplied with this question and answer.

Resolution: Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept alternate answer.

~

Reference WNP-2 System Training, Recirculation Flow Control page 31, has been added to the examination.

Also, PPM 3.12 reactor plant cold S/V. PPM 9.3.12 power plant maneuvers added to reference.

4.08a Comment:

Question 4.08.a is outside the scope of E-S-202.

Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This question is consistent with the requirements of ES-202 with regards that'the candidate should be able to explalia teasotis, cautions, and limitations of normal operating procedures. This question is not a normal procedure step but is a cautionary note contained in the procedure.

4.09a Comment:

Question 4.09.a is outside the scope of ES-202.

Resolution: Facility comment not accepted. This question is consistent with the requirements of ES-202 with regards that candidates should be able to explain reasons, cautions and lisaitations of normal operating procedures. This question is not a normal procedure step but is contained in precaution and limitations 3.3.1.5.F of the reactor scram procedure.

4.10 Comment:

Answer should be either Increase or Remain the Same because HPCS flow is small compared with FW flow at this power level. Also, HPCS flow tends to be " swept upward" due to steam velocity at core exit.

Resolution:

Comment accepted. Answer key adjusted to accept comment.

M ff C EXAM A*fP f c/

lp,

[ m ezw7'S

),~~.,

^

yn N/#

U. S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION REACTOR OPERATOR LICENSE EXAMINATION FACILITY:

WNP-2 REACTOR TYPE:

BWR-GE5 DATE ADMINISTERED: 86/08/11 nrsinst

~ Q y g g (* g p y '

EXAMINER:

HANEK. J.

p/ygg-CANDIDATE:

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE:

Uso separate paper for the answers.

Write answers on one side only.

Staple question sheet on top of the answer sheets.

Points for each quastion are indicated in parentheses after the question.

The passing drade requires at least 70% in each category and a final grade of at least 80%.

Examination papers will be picked up six (6) hours after the examination starts.

% OF CATEGORY

% OF CANDIDATE'S CATEGORY VALUE TOTAL SCORE VALUE CATEGORY 2 r. r'/

25.00

25. CCE 1.

PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION, THERMODYNAMICS, HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW zi. W 25.00 05.007-2.

PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS z r. c +-

25.00 25.00 -

3.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 22efd 23.08

- 2 5. 0iu> - - 2 ". CP 4.

PROCEDURES - NORMAL, ABNORMAL, EMERGENCY AND RADIOLOGICAL

'^

,,, 7, CONTROL 9 7. ro

-100. # 'r-Totals Final Grade All work done on this examination is my own.

I have neither given nor received aid.

Candidate's Signature

t 2 -

o ES-201-2 i

ATTACHMENT 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATION OF WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS 1.

A single room shall be provided for completing the written examina-tion. The location or tnis room e d supporting restroom facilities shall be such as to prevent contact with all other facility and/or contractor personnel during the duration of the written examination.

If necessary, the facility should make arrangements for the use of Ob-a suitable room at a local school, motel, or other building.

taining this room is the responsibility of the licensee.

2.

Minimum spacing is required to ensure examination integrity as determined by the chief examiner. Minimum spacing should be one candidate per table, with a 3-ft space between tables.

No wall charts, models, and/or other training materials shall be present in the examination room.

3.

Suitable arrangements shall be made by the facility if the candi-dates are to have lunch, coffee, or other refreshments.

These arrangements shall comply with Item 1 above. These arrangements shall be reviewed by the examiner and/or proctor.

i 4.

The facility staff shall be provided a copy of the written examination and answer key after the last candidate has completed and handed in his written examination.

The facility staff shall then have five working days to provide formal written comments with supporting documentation on i

the examination and answer key to the chief examiner or to the regional j

office section chief.

3 5.

The licensee shall provide pads of 8-1/2 by 11 in. lined paper in unopened packages for each candidate's use in completing the exam-ination. The examiner shall distribute these pads to the candidates.

)

All reference material needed to complete the examination shall be l

furnished by the examiner.

Candidates can bring pens, pencils, calculators, or slide rules into the examination room, and no other equipment or reference material shall be allowed.

4 6.

Only black ink or dark pencils should be used for writing answers to questions.

l Examiner Standards 11 of 18

s.

D NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS

.Dur*ng the administration of this examination the following rules apply:

1.

Cheating on the examination means an automatic denial of your application and could result in more severe penalties.

2.

Restroom trips are to be limited and only one candidate at a time may leave.

You must avoid all contacts with anyone outside the examination room to avoid even the appearance or possibility of cheating.

4 3.

Use black ink or dark pencil onlY to facilitate legible reproductions.

4.

Print your name in the blank provided on the cover sheet of the examination.

5.

Fill in the date on the cover sheet of the examination (if necessary).

4 6.

Use only the paper provided for answers.

i 7.

Print your name in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section of the answe r sheet.

8.

Consecutively number each answer sheet, write "End of Category __" as appropriate, start each category on a naw Page, write onlY gg QB1 side of the paper, and write "Last Page" on the last answer sheet.

9.

Number each answer as to category and number, for example, 1.4, 6.3.

10. Skip at least three lines between each answer.

1

{

11. Separate answer sheets from pad and place finished answer sheets face down on your desk or table.
12. Use abbreviations only if they are commonly used in facility literature.
13. The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question and can be used as a guide for the depth of answer required.

j

14. Show all calculations, methods, or assumptions used to obtain an answer to mathematical problems whether indicated in the question or not.
15. Partial credit may be given.

Therefore, ANSWER ALL PARTS OF THE QUESTION AND DO NOT LEAVE ANY ANSWER BLANK.

i

16. If parts of the examination are not clear as to intent, ask questions of j

the examiner only.

17. You must sign the statement on the cover sheet that indicates that the work is your own and you have not received or been given assistance in j

completing the examination.

This must be done after the examination has been completed.

i i

)

18. When you complete your examination, you shall:

a.

Assemble your examination as follows:

(1)

Exam questions on top.

(2)

Exam aids - figures, tables, etc.

(3)

Answer pages including figures which are part of the answer.

b.

Turn in your copy of the examination and all pages used to answer the examination questions.

Turn in all scrap paper and the balance of the paper that you did c.

not use for answering the questions.

d.

Leave the examination area, as defined by the examiner.

If after leaving, you are found in this area while the examination is still in progress, your license may be denied or revoked.

l l

-.,<v

,,y.


.w-,--

EQUATION SHEET f = ne v = s/t 2

Cycle efficiency =

  • ' "' I '

w = ag s = v,t +

at Energy (in)

E = aC a = (vg - v,)/t KE = 1 rv A = AN g = v, + a t A = A,e p

v PE = agh w = e/t A = In 2/tg = 0.693/tg W = VAP 4

g(eff) = (t,,)(ts) t AE = 931Am

(

+

)

Q=[ncAT I = I IX

~

P o

Q = UAAT I = I. UX

~

Pwr = W m

-X/ M

~

g I=I lo SUR(t),

IyL = 1.3/u y=p to y=p.t/T HVI. ' O.693/u o

~SUR = 26.06/T

~

T = 1.44 DT SCR = S/(1 - K,gg) fa ge \\

o SUR = 26 CR

= S/(1 - K,gg )

6-p x

1(

  • ff}I CR Cl ~ Keff)2 T = (1*/o ) + [(f _* p)/A,g,p}

~

2 y = g*j (, _ g M = 1/(1 - K,gg) = CR /CR g

0 I " II ~ 8)! A 8

eff M = (1 - Keff)0/II ~ Eeff)1 p = (K,gg-1)/K,gg = AK,gg/K,gg j

[t*/TKygg.] + [I/(1 + 1,gg )]

1* = 1 x 10 seconds

~

p=

T P = I4V/(3 x 1010)

A,gg = 0.1 seconds A

I = No Idgg=1d22 UATER PARAMETERS Id =10 g

22 2

1 gal. = 8.345 lba R/hr = (0.5 CE)/d g,,C,,,)

I gal. = 3.78 liters R/hr = 6 CE/d (feet) 3 1 ft = 7.48 gal.

HISCEI.I.ANEOUS CONVERSIONS 3

Density'= 62.4 lbm/ft 1 Curia = 3.7 x 10 dps 10 3

Density = 1 gm/cm 1 kg = 2.21 1he Heat of vato.rizations = 970 Etu/lbm I hp = 2.54 x 103 BTU /hr 0

Heat of fusien = 144 Btu /lba 1 N = 3.41 x 10 Btu /hr 1 Atm = 14.7 psi = 29.9 in,l's.

1 BLu = 778 f t-lbf 1 ft. H O = 0.4333 lbf/in 1' inch = 2.54 cm 2

F = 9/5 C + 32

  • C = 3/9 (*F - 32)

1'. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 2

TMRMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION 1.01

(.50)

As a subcritical reactor nears criticality, the length of time to reach cquilibrium count rate after an insertion of a given fixed amount of positive reactivity...

(0.5)

(SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER) decreases primarily because of the increased population of delayed a.

neutrons in the core, b.

increases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core.

increases because of a larger number of neutron life cycles required c.

to reach equilibrium.

d.

decreases because the source neutrons are becoming less important in relation to total neutron population.

QUESTION 1.02 (1.50)

In Keff DEPENDENT or INDEPENDENT of initial source range counts (source rcnge neutron population)?

(0.5)

BRIEFLY EXPLAIN YOUR ANSWER (1.0) i QUESTION 1.03 (2.00)

Answer the following TRUE or FALSE:

a.

During equilibrium power conditions, the production rate of indirect Xenon from Iodine is faster than the decay rate of Xenon to Cesium.

(0.5) b.

Slowing the rate of a power decrease, lowers the height of the resultant Xenon peak.

(0.5) c.

The resultant Xenon peak due to a scram from 50% power is larger than one from 100% power.

(0.5) d.

During an increase in power from equilibrium Xenon conditions, Xenon concentration initially decreases.

(0.5)

(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

i m

l l '. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 3

THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW fA,i codsf C4OATC.f. U,/b%'blf fe7 MSW>ts* ffA1A5'A2 j

.rc '/ ysiN/ ' fMf?fA1!'t1 (% int, Cassa pducr Li, Mup, core nyrivy d

effects, cme fby etc.),

QUESTION 1.04 (1.00)

What TWO (Tiysica) phenomena (specifically related to the neutron life cycle and fuel characteristics) along with increasing fuel temperature, contribute to a negative doppler coefficient?

NAME THESE TWO (2)

PHENOMENA [0.5 each].

(1.0)

QUESTION 1.05 (1.50)

If the reactor power level is increased on a positive period from 50 MW to 370 MW in two minutes, what is the doubling time?

(Show all uork.)

(1.5)

QUESTION 1.06 (3.00)

Assume that the reactor is being started up with the bulk coolant temperature less than the saturation temperature.

Excessive rod withdrawal ccuses the reactor to increase in power on a short period.

Of the void, doppler, and moderator temperature coefficients, which will come into offect first, second, and third?

BRIEFLY EXPLAIN!

(Assume no operator action to stop the power increase.)

(3.0)

QUESTION 1.07 (1.00)

During a rapid power increase, very short periods can be maintained, yet for rapid power decreases, the period quickly becomes -80 sec.

Explain the reason for the difference.

(1.0)

(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

..-s

1.

' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 4

TMRMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANS m AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION 1.08 (2.00) 4 The reactor is started up after a refueling outage.

Rods are pulled to the 100% line and power is then increased to 100% with recirculation flow.

After approximately 20 hours2.314815e-4 days <br />0.00556 hours <br />3.306878e-5 weeks <br />7.61e-6 months <br />, reactor power has decreased to about 984.

Assume no operator action.

n.

What is the primary cause for this reduction in power?

(1.0) b.

When whould you expect the power decrease to stop and WHY does it stop?

(1.0)

QUESTION 1.09 (1.50)

With the reactor operating at 50% power and 50% rated flow, the flow is J

increased to 70% of rated.

Briefly explain the effect on power level.

Include Void and Doppler offects and the effect on boiling boundry.

(1.5)

QUESTION 1.10 (1.50) a.

In what direction does the value of Beff change over core life (INCREASE, DECREAE)?

(O.5) b.

Why does the value of Beff change over core life?

(1.0)

QUESTION 1.11 (1.50) a.

Is the thermal limit for MAPRAT less than or greater than 1.07 (0.5) b.

What is the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR7 (1.0)

A %4097 U ""l/ A ' T"ide ^*"f SR Tbd Cowhsiiyv :

rdre.e} 4W: th"D/6f.

' AO.I A/ss M A "/ A 7 e A do nj e rid /Ive/ I d S l O

^'07 j

(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

' l '. ' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 5

THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW l

QUESTION 1.12 (1.00)

Consider a real plant system (NON-IDEAL) with two centrifugal pumps in parallel, one of which is running at 1800 RPM.

The second pump is started and run at 1800 RPM.

System flow will be...

(1.0) 1 SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER a.

more than double the original flow due to decreased flow resistance.

b.

slightly less than double the original flow due to increased flow resistance.

c.

the same since only the discharge head changes.

reduced by one-half due to increased discharge head.

d.

QUESTION 1.13 (1.00)

Of the following operations, which ONE will have a negative effect (reducing effect) on available Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) of a given esntrifugal pump:

(1.0)

SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER l

a.

Throttling open the pump's suction valve.

b.

Throttling open the pump's discharge valve.

c.

Decreasing the pump's speed.

d.

Decreasing the temperature of the fluid (water) being pumped.

QUESTION 1.14 (1.00)

There is 15 feet of water in the CST whose base is at ground level.

The HPCS pump is forty feet below grade.

Assuming no friction effects, datermine the pressure (psig) at the HPCS suction.

Show all work.

(1.0) i I

l I

(***** CATEGORY 01 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

  • '1 '. 'FRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE G

TIERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSnx AND FLUID FLOW QUESTION 1.15 (1.50)

The term " critical power" refers to that bundle power level corresponding to the onset of transition boiling (OTB) somewhere in that bundle.

State how critical power varies (ie. INCREASES, DECREASES, or IS NOT AFFECTED) by each of the following:

(1.5) c.

If coolant mass flow rate increases b.

If reactor pressure increases c.

If inlet subcooling increases QUESTION 1.16 (3.50) a.

List FOUR parameters which contribute to AVAILABLE NFSH for a recirculation pump.

Limit your answer to those parameters which are directly available in the control room.

(2.0) b.

Consider two RPV conditions:

low power and low flow (<10%) OR high power and high flow (>85%).

1.

During which condition is REQUIRED NPSH for a recirculation pump greater?

(0.5) 2.

During which condition is AVAILABLE NPSH for a recirculation pump greater and WHY is it greater?

(1.0) l

(***** END OF CATEGORY 01 *****)

, - ' 7:

Pr. ANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 7

QUESTION 2.01

(.50)

At High Reactor pressures (1000 psig), what specific component.n the CRD mechanism allows vessel pressure to assist in the scram process for an individual rod.

(0.5)

QUESTION 2.02 (2.50)

Concerning the Recirculation Pump Trip (RPT) circuit, provide the following:

a.

What action occurs following an RPT signal (specific to the recirc system)?

(0.5) b.

Why is it more important at EOL than BOL?

(1.0) c.

When is it automatically bypassed?

(0.5) d.

How and where is it manually bypassed?

(0.25) o.

Is the logic (choose one)

(0.25) 1.

1 out of 2 2.

2 out of 3 3.

1 out 2 taken twice 4.

2 out of 4 I

(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

I

^

m r.y amy

2 '. ' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERCENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 8

QUESTION 2.03 (2.50)

Concerning the Nuclear Steam Supply Shutoff System (NSSSS), Match the c.

following group number with the below brief descriptions of the Isolation Groups.

(1.4)

GROUP DESCRIPTION 1

a.

Reactor water sample valves 2

b.

Reactor water cleanup 3

c.

RHR and TIP system 4

d.

MSIV's and main steam line drains 5

e.

Primary and secondary containment ventilation and purge systems 6

f.

RHR (shutdown cooling mode) 7 g.

Miscellaneous balance of plant (RCCW, fuel pool cooling, circ water, ect.)

[7 9 0.2 each]

b.

From the following list, select which NSSSS pushbutton or combinations of pushbuttons must be pushed to cause the following actions:

(1.1) 1.

All MSIV's to close and an inboard isolation of Groups 1, 2,

5, 6, and 7.

x 2.

Trip (close) all MSIV's.

3.

Inbd NSSSS Groups 1 (except MSIV's), 2, 5, 6, and 7.

4.

Outbd NSSSS Groups 1 (except MSIV's), 2, 5, 6 and 7.

5.

All MSIV's to close and an outboard isolation of Groups 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7.

NSSSS PUSHBUTTON OR COMBINATIONS B

C and D.

A and B A or C AND B or D D

(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

2.

PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 9

QUESTION 2.04 (1.00)

FILL IN THE BLANKS.

The leak detection system sensitivity and response time is such that an unidentified leakage rate increase of in less than will be detected.

(1.0)

QUESTION 2.05 (2.00) c.

What are the High flow alarm setpoints from the drywell equipment and floor drain sumps?

(1.0) i l

b.

What TWO components generate the High Flow Alarms?

.(1.0)

QUESTION 2.06 (1.75) a.

List THREE different components that are most likely to cause radioactive leakage into the RCCW system.

(0.75) b.

What are TWO alarms that would indicate radioactive Inleakage?

(0.5) c.

What automatic action could occur ir: the event of radioactive inleakage?

(0.5)

QUESTION 2.07

(.50)

Although the HPCS can serve as a backup for the RCIC system, why is its use in this capacity not recommended unless required by plant conditions? (0.5)

(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

'2.

'FLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 10 QUESTION 2.08 (2.00)

What affect would closing the RCIC exhaust line isolation valve RCIC V-68 have under the following conditions:

Explain your answer.

(Confine your answer to the RCIC system only.)

i Just prior to receiving an automatic initiation signal.

(1.0) a.

b.

After receiving an automatic initiation signal (assume RCIC is injecting).

(1.0)

QUESTION 2.09 (2.00)

Draw a one line sketch of the pneumatic supply system to a typical ADS valve.

Indicate the sources of the pneumatic supply, power supply, and normal state (open closed energized deenergized of any valves).

(2.0)

QUESTION 2.10 (3.00)

In accordance with ppm 5.1.3, Reactor Power Control, SLC injection n.

will be initiated when what plant conditions exist?

(1.0) b.

List FOUR automatic actions that occur when the keylock switch is turned to System "A".

(2.0)

.\\

(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

  • ~ 2.
  • PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 11 QUESTION 2.11 (3.25)

Concerning the off-gas system.

a.

List the following items in the correct order of system flow path.

from the second stage air ejector to the elevated release point.

(2.1) 1.

Off-gas condenser 2.

Off-gas catalytic recombiner 3.

Off-gas cooler condensers 4.

Off-gas moisture separators 5.

Off-gas preheaters 6.

Off-gas water separator 7.

Off-gas gas prefilters 8.

Off-gas gas coolers 9.

Off-gas hydrogen analyzers.

10.

Off-gas after filters 11.

10 minute holdup

'12.

Off-gas charcoal adsorbers

-13.-Of t-see 1 glyco 1-cooling system per scran//y su off-y cmpwen.

14.

Off-gas desiccant dryers b.

Briefly describe the interrelationship and function provided to the off-gas system by the CAS system.

(1.15)

E Qwo-]t QUESTION 2.12 (3.00)

Provide a brief description of the THREE different water supplied sprinkler cystems used in the Fire Protection Systems.

Include in your answer the cetions that must occur in the system to start water flow to a fire.

(3.0)

QUESTION 2.13

(.50)

TRUE of FALSE?

Each DC system has sufficient capacity to supply the DC load requirements of its respective division under conditions of a DBA for at least 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> without battery chargers.

(0.5)

-1

(***** CATEGORY 02 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

~

2.

' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 12 i

l QUESTION 2.14

(.50)

TRUE or FALSE?

)

The main generat,or reverse power relay 67G provides the protection for the turbine and power system, not the generator.

i i

i

(***** END OF CATEGORY 02 *****)

3.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 13 QUESTION 3.01 (2.75)

Concerning the "setpoint setdown" circuit in the feedwater level control

circuit, a.

What is the function?

(0.75) b.

How is the actuation signal for the system sensed?

(0.5)

List TWO automatic actions that occur when the system is c.

actuated.

(1.0) d.

What action occurs when the system is reset (Include Rate Time Frame)?

(0.5)

QUESTION 3.02 (1.75)

Concerning the feedwater level control system:

a.

What effect will a loss of one steam flow transmitter (fails downscale) have on the following indications (DECREASE, INCREASE or REMAIN THE SAME).

(1.5)

Consider BOTH transient and final conditions.

Transient Final 1.

Reactor vessel level 2.

Feedwater flow 3.

Total indicated steam flow b.

Will this failure cause a reactor scram when operating in three element control at 100% power?

(0.25)

QUESTION 3.03 (2.00)

Concerning the HPCS Diesel Generator Governor Droop Switch (DROOP / ISO).

a.

Provide a brief description when each position is used.

(1.0) b.

What is the normal setting of this switch.

(0.25) c.(Howmuch" DROOP"isinsertedand)whyisitcontrolled?

(0.75) can Wt.rcope d fS'202.?

way p ros/* jn r risarco... n ucy j

n ons-se on ts" 7==y exs u M m r seeussar,,,

(/

(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

'"' ' =h M

3 '.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 14 QUESTION 3.04 (2,50)

Concerning the SRM retract permissive interlock, What are TWO conditions that generate this Interlock?

(0.75) a.

b.

List THREE manual and automatic conditions that bypass this Interlock.

(1.5)

Will this Interlock stop detector movement when actuated?

(0.25) c.

QUESTION 3.05 (2.75)

Refer to the attached Figure 1 of Pulse Height vs. Applied Voltage.

a.

Identify the following areas (Region).

(1.0) 2 3

5 6

b.

In what area is each of the following detectors operated.

(Identify by number.)

(1.75) 1.

SRM 2.

IRM 3.

Fuel load dunking chamber 4.

Area radiation monitors (ARMS) 5.

Main steam line rad monitors 6.

Portable frisker station 7.

Dose rate setting portable instrument (CUTIE PIE or RAD OWL)

QUESTION 3.06 (1.00)

FILL IN THE BLANKS.

Transition from startup to run must be made with all APRMs between

% and.

% power to prevent a rod block.

(1.0)

(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

9 O

~O PULSE HEIGHT VS.

~

APPLIED VOLTAGE ZERO GAS l

GAS

/

g g/

g AMPLiflCATION l

AMPLIFICATION g

4 kj4 y

]

10" l

1 I

I i

i 1080 l

l 1

I 108 l

l I

l l t l

l 1E I

l l

Pu 10' I

b I

IR I

I i

i uj 10' I

M 3

l l

W i

i l

l l

I 8

105 - s I

l g

g i

l

\\ I5l l'* ^a li z

5 l

E I

l a

,0 i

i i

I i

I i

102 i

l I

I l

1 I

i I

I l

102 l

l l

l

'l l

i l

r

,0, l

i I

I i

i 100 I

I I

I I

i i

I I

N i

i l

i I

i M

O APPLIED VOLTAGE h

PULSE HEIGHT VS. APPLIED VOLTAGE FOR GAS FILTER DETECTORS i

icune /

i

'3.

' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 15 btN'gg\\ d\\dS) l fg pW jfn[i

~

f04 ub j c 9.

W QUESTION 3.07 (2.25)

List FOUR conditions that could actuate the APRM flow bias 3 M o.

off-normal annunciator.

Include applicable setpoints.

(1.0) b.

What protective function (s) would occur as a result of this annunciator?

(0.25) c.

What effect on system operation would occur if flow

~cc.T.;ut:r A is bypassed?

(Limit your response to the APRM C ' flow computer-)

(1.0) commroe J QUESTION 3.08 (2.50)

Concerning the RBM Gain Change Circuit.

a.

What is the purpose of the gain change circuit?

(0.5) b.

List TWO reasons for increasing the gain of a RBM channel.

(1.0)

What are the reference APRM inputs to RBM Channels A and B c.

(normal and alternate)?

(1.0)

QUES TION 3.09 (2.00)

Concerning Excess Flow Check Valves.

Q.

What is their function?

(0.5) b.

What type of lines are they installed in.

(0,5) c.

What is the function of the bypass valve?

How is an excess flow check valve reopened following an automatic initiation?

(0.5) d.

Where is excess flow check valve position displayed.

(Be specific, area and panel.)

(0.5)

(***** CATEGORY 03 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

3.

' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 16 QUESTION 3.10 (1.50)

When operating at 100% power, the wide range level instrument reads 15-20 inches lower than the narrow range indicator.

a.

Is this mismatch a concern for the operator?

Explain your (0.75).

answer.

b.

Can the wide range level instrument be used to accurately indicate level at TOP of Active Fuel (TAF).

Explain your (0.75) answer.

QUESTION 3.11 (2.00)

Concerning the recire flow control system.

a.

List THREE automatic actions that occur upon receipt of a High Drywell Pressure signal (>1.68 psig).

(Limit your response to the recire flow control system.)

(1.5) b.

What is the basis for these automatic actions?

(0.5)

QUESTION 3.12 (2.00)

During normal operation of the TIP SYSTEM, c.

List two automatic actions initiated by a HIGH drywell pressure signal (>1.68 psig).

(Limit your response to the TIP system.)

(1.0) b.

List two indications that the TIP operator could use to verify that the automatic actions had taken place.

(1.0)

(***** END OF CATEGORY 03 *****)

i

  • 4.

' PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 17 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION 4.01 (1.00)

What guidelines must be used by an operator prior to securing or placing en ECCS in manual?

(1.0)

QUESTION 4.02

(.50)

What actions are required if an individuals TLD is lost or damaged?

(0.5)

QUESTION 4.03 (1.00)

Under what TWO conditions may the operator deviate from an approved procedure?

(1.0)

QUESTION 4.04

(.50)

What action is required for the following condition concerning the rGactor recirc pumps during normal power operation?

Loss of both seal injection flow and RCCW seal cooling flow.

(0.5)

QUESTION 4.05 (1.50) a.

Following a recire pump trip, the plant operating procedure directs the operator to close the recire pump discharge valve and then reopen it?

What is the basis for this action?

(1.0) b.

When is it reopened?

(0.5) l

(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

4.

' PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY A@

PAGE 16 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION 4.06 (2.00)

When withdrawing control rods, Plant Startup Procedure 3.1.2 requires a valid coupling check be performed.

Explain how a valid coupling check is made.

(1.5) a.

b.

What indication will tell the operator the rod is uncoupled?

(0.5)

QUESTION 4.07

(.50)

TRUE or FALSE?

With the RSCS inoperable, whenever power is less than or equal to 20% rated thermal power, normal control rod movement is permitted if the RWM is operable.

(0.5)

QUESTION 4.08 (2.00)

FILL IN THE BLANKS.

ours/WF cope of ES-D2 (Anackdb a.

When forced cooling is not available in cold shutdown condition, reactor water level shall be maintained at or above If for any reason water level cannot be maintained above this level in this condition, reactor vessel temperature shall be monitored once per (1.5) b.

Why is the vessel water level raised in this condition?

(0.5)

QUESTION 4.09 (2.00) a.

List THREE parameters or actions that the operator should check f

/

or preform prior to restarting the condensate booster pumps I

following a scram.

[3 0 0.5 each]

(1.5) b.

Why are these actions necessary?

(0,5)

Ax, n.sans 70 4 sawye rAe scope of a.202 bdd)

(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

' 4.

PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 19 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL QUESTION 4.10 (2.75)

While operating at 100% rated thermal power, a HPCS actuation occurs.

How will the following parameters respond to the automatic actions c.

of the plants control systems (INCREASE, DECREASE or REMAIN THE (1.0)

SAME)?

1.

Feedwater flow 2.

Reactor vessel level 3.

Steam flow

,4.

Thermal power b.

What are the THREE immediate operator actions required per Procedure 4.4.4.2, Inadvertent HPCS Startup?

(1.75)

QUESTION 4.11

(.50)

TRUE or FALSE?

'HPCS and RCIC suctions will automatically transfer from the suppression pool to the CST on high suppression pool level.

(0.5)

QUESTION 4.12 (2.75)

List the FIVE entry conditions for RPV pressure control (RPV/P).

Include applicable setpoints.

(2.75)

QUESTION 4.13 (1.50)

Define adequate core cooling, as used in the Emergency Procedures and Standing Operating Orders.

(1.5)

)

l QUESTION 4.14 (1.50)

In order of preference, what are THREE viable mechanisms which can assure cdequate core cooling is achieved?

(1.5)

(***** CATEGORY 04 CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE *****)

i

4.

' PROCEDURES'- NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 23 RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL

'l QUESTION

.15 -

(2.50) g g

g g, g ;3

/

O uT S t

%A7 5 A.

\\

a. 'While conducting a ull flow survei ance t e RCIC system the

)

operator shall verify *that the suppress on pool temperature is less than a.1.

degt s F at st once per a.2.

s (1.0) minutes.

{

In accordance with Tech pecs.,

AT actions are required if suppression pool te ature reache 110 degrees F?

(1,5

/

y

~

QUESTION 4.16 (2.50)

Control Room Evacuation Procedure 4.12.1.1 discusses the immediate actions corried out by each of the reactor operators in the control room if an evacuation is ordered.

List FOUR immediate operator actions that would be carried out by the c.

operator assigned to the " Reactor Controls".

(2.0) b.

Who has the authority to order an evacuation of the control room? (0.5) t

(***** END OF CATEGORY 04 *****)

(************* END OF EXAMINATION ***************)

~

  • PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION, FACE 21 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

MASTER COPY

^^"#

9 #" ' '

  1. nt(ItW LUrY,5 ANSWER 1.01

(.50)

(0.5)

?/syIt c

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory-Student Text, Ch. III, P. 20 Ch. VI, PP. 1 and 2 ANSWER 1.02 (1.50)

INDEPENDENT (0.5)

Koff (the neutron life cycle) only considers fission neutrons in the self-sustaining reaction.

(1.0)

REFERENCE Reactor Theory - Student Text, Ch. VI, P. 2

)

ANSWER 1.03 (2.00) a.

TRUE b.

TRUE c.

FALSE d.

TRUE

[4 9 0.5 each]

(2.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory - Student Text, Ch. V, PP. 1-4 ANSWER 1.04 (1.00) 1.

Doppler Effect (resonance broadening-neutron absorbtion at other than descrete energies).

(0.5) 2.

Self-Shielding (heterogeneous fuel pins).

(0.5) l REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. IV, P. 9 l

C PRINCIP N OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 22 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 1.05 (1.50)

P = Poe t/T 370 = 50e 120 sec/T (0.5)

T = 59.95 sec (0.5)

T X Doubling Time = ----------- 1.445 (0,5)

DT = 41.49 see REFERENCE Reactor Theory Student Text, Chapter III, PP. 14 and 15 ANSWER 1.06 (3.00) n.

FIRST:

Doppler deals with fuel temperature, and this will be the first parameter to change.

(1.0) b.

Second:

Moderator temperature coefficient begins adding negative reactivity as soon as sufficient heat is transferred to the coolant to raise coolant temperature.

(1.0) c.

Third:

Void coefficient will have little or no effect until saturation temperature is reached.

(1.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VIII, PP. 26 and 27 ANSWER 1.07 (1.00)

The period during power increase is governed by how quickly the neutron population can increase. [0.5]

The same holds true on a power decrease, J

however, the neutron population is dominated by the longest lived delayed neutron precursor. [0.5]

This decays with -80 sec. period.

(1.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VI, P.

16 ANSWER 1.08 (2.00) a.

As.the reactor operates at power, Xenon builds in to equilibrium [0.5],

adding negative ' reactivity, causing power to decrease (0.5].

(1.0) b.

In 40-50 hours [0.5] when equilibrium Xenon is reached [0.5].

(1.0) i m... _ _. _.,, _

1.

' PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 23 THERMODINAMICS. HEAT TRANS m AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Chapter V, P 9 of 10 ANSWER 1.09 (1.50)

Qh q, 4

Power increase as recire flow is increased.

The increase in power is due W/

to the addition of positive reactivity as voids are swept away by the increase in recirculation flow ( W e As power increases, fuel temperature increases, inserting negative reactivity due to doppler broadening (0.5) f -

As this new heat is transferred to t coolant, more void formation occurs, thus more negative reactivity Therefore, boiling boundary is back to its original location, approximate (1.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Theory Student Text, Ch.

8, PP. 28-30 ANSWER 1.10 (1.50) a.

DECREASE (0.5) b.

There is an increased percentage of fissioning from Pu 239 i

which has a smaller delayed neutron fraction than U 238 and U 235.

(1.0)

REFERENCE Raactor Theory Student Text, Ch. VII, P. 4 (1.50)

/

ANSWE 1 11

a. J:%. aa,er a w ay~ s~rk ass"a, a

(0.5) b.

MAPRAT = APLHGR/MAPLHGR Limit -or-APLHGR (actual)/MAPLHGR fd 6

(LCO max)

(1.0) hn+4a tim 7)

REFERENCE General Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, j

Ch. 9 P. 7Pe%

/%9///7 h rhe co psares' m/cssA9riha << sed ro /WMf)-

utere rse Mse denu/ Ah m de aceeoW i

1.

  • PRIRQIP MR OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 24 TWRMODYNAMICS. M AT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 1.12 (1.00) b.

(1.0)

REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P.

116 ANSWER 1.13 (1.00) b.

(1.0)

REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P.

123 ANSWER 1.14 (1.00)

(62.4 lbm)

(55 ft - O ft) 2 P

= ---------- x --------------

OR 1 ft H O = 0.4335 lbf/in 2

2 3

2 2

(ft )

(144 in /ft )

55 ft x 0.4335 = 23.8 psig 2

P

= 23.8 lbm/in (psig)

(1.0) 2 REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and fluid Flow, Ch. 7, P. 20 ANSWER 1.15 (1.50) a.

INCREASES b.

DECREASES c.

INCREASES

[3 9 0.5 each]

(2.0) 4 REFERENCE Gcneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch.

9, PP. 93-96

1. PRINCIPLES OF NUCLEAR POWER PLANT OPERATION.

PAGE 25 THERMODYNAMICS. HEAT TRANSFER AND FLUID FLOW ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ll}$%' A h

C ANSWER 1.16 (3,50

/fdS fR*0 MT'*"h, Re or ower he An e (* altup)'

FW temp Fu)

FW flow

~

RPV pressure RPV level

[any 4 9 0.5 each]

(2.0) b.

1.

High flow high power (0.5) 2.

High flow high power, due to increased inlet subcooling from increased FW flow.

(1.0)

REFERENCE Gsneral Electric - Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Ch. 7, PP. 92-97 P

2.
  • PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 26

~

' ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

l ANSWER 2.01

(.50)

Ball check valves (0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, CRDH, P. 23, Figure 11 ANSWER 2.02 (2.50)

(0.5) f a.

Shifts the recirc pumps to slow.

y'j $r#18g/

b.[Fluxshapesattheendofcyclearesuchthatthe)rodscannot st insert sufficient reactivity during the first few feet of

, rod travel on a scram due to a turbine trip.

4[

(1.0)

When + s turbine steam flow

< 142 psi first stage

[ c.

pressudr (either answer accep WOf*

  1. 7Kved/MRC (0,5) f d.

Key lock switch on back panels p609 and p611.

(0.25) l e.

(4) 2 out of 4 (0.25)

See 0 AfMCb REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, Reactor Recire, P. 31 ANSWER 2.03 (2.50) a.

1 (d) 2 (a) 3 (e) 4 (g) 5 (c) 6 (f) 7 (b)

[7 at 0.2 each]

(1.4) b.

1.

C and D (0.2) 2.

A or C AND B or D (0.5) 3.

D (0,1) 4.

B (0.1)

>5.

A and B (0.2)

L Y = =, =- Q= /

C,s_ ff ha

,_f,ff

)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, (NSSSS) PP.

3 and 15

/

1

2. ' PLM'T DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 27

" ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 2.04 (1.00) a.

1.

One gpm 2.

One Hour (1.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Leak Detection System, PP. 2, 4 and 5 ANSWER 2.05 (2.00) gpm)

(0.5)

Equipment sump [25[5 gpm) n.

(0.5)

Floor drain sump ~

(0.5) b.

. Pump out timer Sump fill timer (0,5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Leak Detection System, PP. 2, 4 and 5 ANSWER 2.06 (1.75) a.

1.

RWCU non-regenerative heat exchangers 2.

RWCU pump coolers 3.

Recire pump jacket cooler

[3 9 0.25 each] (0.75) b.

1.

Surge tank high level slarm.

2.

Closed cooling water high radiation alarm.

[2 9 0.25 each]

(0.5)

Surge tank vent valve' closes.

(0.5) c.

re")

g,,fgee er REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, RCCW, PP. 19 and 21 ANSWER 2.07

(.50)

HPCS water injection is a large thermal shock on the vessel nozzle (0.5) cnd sparger./g r ;-

,x-

[ d~ p cs -see5

-e r =7

/~~<'

= 4 H ~-r w-s ~ v.~o f e i c.

"#"~"'

REFERENCE n

d^

WNP-2, System Training HPCS, Pi 12, 2

-r.._-,.-~

r a, ~ -7 e -s,.s-sis,

we s M :' - r - n

. p,.

-z

.es e i 5 7n sue s

. W"#*

  • , fr s re -* I fa,,, nowd /t'C/f.,s".3f
2. -PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 28

. ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 2.08 (2.00) a.

RCIC would not initiate because of the interlock between RCIC V-68 and RCIC V-45 (1.0) b.

RCIC would trip on high exhaust line back pressure.

(1.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training RCIC, PP. 21 and 25 e d, 1 q. rti, C US b ffl')

t ANSWER 2,09 (2.00)

' dy dy rv, or 2

g Vce 7mr r s c, ~ <* e '

l 7,eeu, }~,3,-

pp 3Q h.;3 l

I m

~

c.-ce c

e..,,

gyp? -

b o

c - c., r a, -

uot :~o T :,,a }_-
g

-7<-7 n,,,,m o sw r see.

&-h~p'f~~ph_~j p

1 I

I aus aus aus I

soi e2s en vacuum sneAxen l

N- -

fl stA N-5 N

th)yf pg TYMCAL OF sEVEN ADS VALVES

[9.1 credit for cach iter merked en :ttachcd th:tch]

~

12. 0 P

'~

r, REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training ADS, PP. 3, 7 and Figure 5 i

3

2.

PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 29

' ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

l l

yRlufS E NA2[7y i

ANSWER 2.10 (3.00) 4 o.

Reacim pc :r is ::reater then4% vor Aritn s [C.20] w cannet

/f Lo determined [0.25-](AND reactor cannot be shutdown [0.$f before suppression pool temperature reaches 110 F [0 9'.))

(1.0) b.

1.

Isolates cleanup system outboard isolation valve.

2.

Starts "A" injection pump.

3.

Fires both "A" and "B" squib valves.

4.

Opens both pump suction valves.

[4 @ 0.5 each]

(2.0) 9 j,ff ftl9d N h Aff it h

'~ ~'%

)

FERENCE S p n '

  • n /-

Systems Training SLC, PP. 8 and 16 WNP-2, A w.a s u or7 _

/

ANSWER 2.11 (3.25) o.

1.

Preheaters 2.

Catalytic recombiner 3.

Off-gas condenser 4.

Water separator 5.

Hydrogen analyzer e r 6.

10 mint.te holdup

7e-a',.;. yg,f,',0,

,,c,.,.,,

e-c ur-

)

7.

Cooler condensers c,-e

,,, wer s e r sw""]

8.

Moisture separator

'~'

9.

Prefilter W

m cal

1i;.;

, = %,e

/0 fl.

Desiccant dryers

'""L~-

~" ^ " #

// 14.

Gas coolers f u 1-3.

Charcoal adsorbers a

.N4 14.

After filter 7: r - d' '

[Tt 9 0.-t5 each]

(2.1) b.jj Valves in the off-gas system [++fr] are supplied with air from the CAS system for stem sealing F-This prevents radioactive gasses from escaping from f)1e of - as system [

].

.f/ d s/;.;

(1.15)

\\

Lt SeR tb (,4vM c$o fW fyjfe-n[c,;)}

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Off-gas Processing, PP. 3-6 and 29 i

hM d-dV Slff d f f/ 'l f' Vf

g/g used ra "we-ap " rAr sysen 6a AMeke"N b/J<c~<#

2.

' PLANT DESIGN INCLUDING SAFETY AND EMERGENCY SYSTEMS PAGE 33

, ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 2.12 (3.00) 1.

Wet pipe:

normally pressurized with water, elevated temperature melts the fusible link in the sprinkler head to start flow.

['ressurizedwithairbetweenthedelugevalve 2.

Dry pipe / pre-action:

p andsprinklerhead)tsdareaasignalissent When a potential fire is sensed in the protec to open the deluge valve.

Elevated temperature in the protected area will melt the fusible link to start flow.

3.

Deluge Spray:

Dry pipe with open spray nozzles.

When a fire is sensed in the protected area it will send a signal to open the deluge valve to immediately start flow to the fire.

[0.25 for each correct name]

[0.25 for each correct description]

[0.5 for each correct system action]

(3.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Fire Protection System, PP. 11-14 ANSWER 2.13

(.50)

FALSE (0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training DC Power System, P. 3 ANSWER 2.14

(.50)

TRUE (g,5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Main Generator, P. 23 I

3. ' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 31

' ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 3.01 (2.75) c.

The circuit is designed to reduce the vessel inventory setpoint to a value which is sufficient to maintain reactor water level b#ow the level 8 trip setpoint following a scram.

(0.75)

(0.5)

Scram relays (or AX and AY relays.) lement to single element.

b.

1.

Transfers FWLC system from 3 e (0.5) i c.

2.

Lowers the vessel level setpoint to + 18 inches ( M (0.5) d.

The level setpoint will "rampup" to the value shown on the master (0.5) controller over a.two minute period.)

Mik/C (sec m McAnter REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Feedwater Level Control, P. 6

  1. 5 Z2 / /2tu.cbr S&rm _ f / cry ANSWER 3.02 (1.75)

Transient Final c.

1.

Reactor vessel level DECREASE DECREASE 2.

Feedwater flow DECREASE SAME 3.

Total indicated steam flow DECREASE DECREASE

[6 0 0.25 each]

(1.5) b.

No.

(0.25)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Feedwater Level Control, P. 15 ANSWER 3.03 (2.00) a.

1.

Droop is used when operating in parallel with other power sources.

(0.5) 2.

ISO is used when suppling an isolated bus.

(0.5) l b.

ISO (0.25) c.

DROOP: (ihs-erts a 5% ispeed cYUop Izvie ? te-fu1 M a d-OR

, TEtie57he' iltf=loiid !FpWdietting=SE)fo compensate j

for droop in speed created by an increase in load.

(0.75)

- cA -

sl0 7/</ N'/ 4 (n-e"^~

to fi ~-Q 74 G e' f e

A r un -

o/(,

REFERENCE r,.

WNP-2, Systems Training Diesel Generators, P. 64

/

,,,,7,,p n,

7ia

/ e ** $

  • 3.

' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 32

~

.' ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

f ANSWER 3.04 (2.50) a.

SRM detector not fully inserted AND SRM count rate < 100 CPS (0.75) b.

Bypassed when:

Mso :

SCM > /wc/s 1.

ALL IRM range switches are on Range 3 or above.

.5) 2.

SRM channel is bypassed.

(d. )

/

(

(/f (0.25) 3 Mode switch is in run l

c. 'Nb SA M >. /80 4 N Ay

,G /r/ 6/

  1. * > f' REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training SRM's, P. 27 ANSWER 3.05 (2.75) c.

Area 2 - Ionization I# ^

Area 3 - Proportional Area 5 - Geiger Mueller (GM)

Area 6 - Continuous Discharge (a- <<~~r e ~""]4 9 0. 25 each] (1.0) b.

1.

SRM - Area 2 2.

IRM - Area 2 3-

,j ffA, I -

3.

Fuel load dunking chamber - Area 3 e'r - ?, ~,,,,"' ' " ' V 4.

ARM's - Area 5 5.

Main steam line rad monitors - Area 2 6.

Portable frisker station - Area 5 7.

Dose rate setting portable instrument - Area 2

[7 9 0.25 each](1.75)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training, SRM's, P. 7 and Figure 4, ARM's P. 2, Process Effluent Radiation Monitoring System, P. 4 ANSWER 3.06 (1.00) a.

1.

5% 0 ' 3 Y W V *' V 2.

12%

[2 9 0.5 each]

(1.0) i l

REFERENCE

//

WNP-2,. Systems Training APRM's, P. L9 ) M'8M 7un,u e.

s-e c <no n w J

  • 3.

' INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 33

' ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK J.

ANSWER 3.07 (2.25) a.

1.

>10% difference between comparators 2.

Upscale trip 108%

3.

Mode switch not in operate 4.

Module in the flow unit is removed

[4 at 0.25 each]

(1.0) b Rod block (0.25) hh c.

If a flow unit is bypassed the flow signal to the comparator is automatically bypassed to the next unit. (If A is bypassed, then i

the signal from flow Unit C would be compared with flow Unit B)

(1.0)

(+ 1 S y & & c c-0 @ ~ d ~ ~ ~ ~ro)

REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training APRM's, PP. 10 and 11

'd ' " M#

r m re urm e ANSWER 3.08 (2.50) a.

To change gain of averaging amplifier so that the RBM output (averaging amplifier output) will be equal to or greater than reference APRM output.

(0.5) b.

1.

Local power may be significantly lower than core (0.5) average power.

2.

Several of the highesc reading LPRM's that normally input to a RBM channel might be bypassed.

(0.5) c.

RBM A - APRM C Normal APRM E Alternate RBM B - APRM D Normal APRM F Alternate

[4 0 0.25 each)

(1.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training REM System, PP. 8, 9 and 31 ANSWER 3.09 (2.00) a.

The function of the valves is to shut-off flow in the event of a leak or line rupture downstream of the valve.

(0.5) hhb.-~La.u

~ instrument lines (with normally no flow ouu conditions)

(0.5)

To equalize pressure on both sides of the valve after an c.

actuation thus allowing spring pressure to reopen the valve.

(0.5) d.

Board S in the control room.

(0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, System Training Nuclear Boiler Instrument, PP. 48 and 49

3.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS PAGE 34

. ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

j ANSWER 3.10 (1.50) n.

No.

(0.25)

The wide range indicator is calibrated with no jet pump flow so at 100% power it will read 15-20" low due to the draw down effect of the jet pumps.

(0.5)

(0.25) b.

No.

TAF is -161 inches, lower end of wide range level isntrument is -150 inches.

(0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training Nuclear Boiler Instrumentation, PP. 17, 58, and 59 fy offARTCo%'v AUT[" fb"5 ANSWER 3.11 (2.00)

-7/it a A p e

  • 7 r- / /

gg f je. 4 m -< z v ' -

ul.

?ransf ers boi,li luv_r_ lov centroller_% - enterstrie

-to manual. " -

00-5F#

2.

Locks the flow control valves.

6 I)C '. '( E 5) ^ >5 3.

Locks the recirc pump discharge valves.

(_ r) ( -,f e d P j:

b.

The basis for these automatic actions is to allow rapid vessel depressurization in the event of a break in the 7 / #),

recirculation system piping.

-t0-STr

/2dfdA&M Y.' 7

, yp,).s syJ /en NO,b [^)

/d M '/- {& C N

f JJ h e s A,,,n 7,,,,,,-,.,,,,n r

m

3.. e e nn, ANSWER 3.12 (2.00)

,g a.1. Automatic TIP withdrawal.

a.2. TIP ball valve closes.

b.1.

In-Shield light lit.

I b.2. Valve open light lit

y. ep (4 @ 0.5 ea.)

V,,n, Q a.

y

,e z. win

,,,,,cr REFERENCE WNP-2, Systems Training TIPS PP 11, 13, and 14.

9

d'.

' PRO ('EDURES - NORMAL. ABNCRMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 35

, RADIOLOGICAL cot!IRQL 4

  • ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

ANSWER 4.01 (1.00)

TWO independent indications confirm misoperation in automatic mode or Edequate core cooling is assured.

(1.0).

REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.2.1, Standing Orders ANSWER 4.02

(.50)

Leave the controlled area and notify the HP/ chemistry department.

(0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.11.3, P. 8 ANSWER 4.03 (1.00)

When it is necessary to prevent injury to personnel or damage to the plant.

(1.0)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 1.2.3, P. 2 ANSWER 4.04

(.50)

Shutdown the pump within one minute.

(0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 2.2.1, P. 4 ANSWER 4.05 (1.50) a.

Close the valve to prevent reverse rotation of the pump.

It is reopened to maintain the idle loop temperature.

~

'(1.0) b.

After 5 minutes.

(0.5)

d'.

  • PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 36

,. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL l

AdSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 2.2.1, P. 4 ANSWER 4.06 (2.00)

By attempting to pull each control rod withdrawn to Position 48 a.

to the overtravel position.

A valid coupling check requires a continuous withdraw signal be maintained long enough to observe drive stall flow at Position 48.

(1.5) b.

Rod overtravel alarm.

(0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Cold Startup Procedure 3.1.2, P. 6 ANSWER 4.07

(.50)

FALSE REFERENCE WNP-2, Plant Shutdown Procedure 3.2.1, P.

5 ANSWER 4.08 (2.00) a.

1.

80 inches 2.

metal 3.

hour

[3 0 0.5 each]

(1.5) b.

To insure natural circulation core cooling capability.

(0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Normal Shutdown to Cold Shutdown Procedure 3.2.1, P. 11 ANSWER 4.09 (2.00) a.

1.

Reactor feedwater pressure 3ess than 420 psig OR 2.

Reactornfeedwater temperature is less than 340 F.

3.

RWCU flow is returned to the RPV and allowed to repressure the feedwater piping.

[3 0 0.5 each]

(1.5) b.

To. minimize water hammer upon restart.

(0.5) 4

---.-.= --

~ Y. ' PROCEDURES-- NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AND PAGE 37

,. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL ANSWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

REFERENCE WNP-2, Reactor Scram Procedure 3.3.1, PP. 2 and 3 1

ANSWER 4.10 (2.75) l o.

1.

DECREASE 2.

INCREASE

.,,eg3 g,yg,e pcg gu 4 w// mg e.ry/ & NWf

[4N b 5 e h] (

0)

Notify control roo[m isupervisor.fj'S j If d k N N"#

RE f#

7 h oe 44we-ge__ r, (0.25 e

verify reiii5 tor vessel MMM MV W) b.

1.

2.

Using redundant indications, water level and drywell pressure are normal.

(0.5) 3.

Shut HPCS injection valve (HPCS-V-4), and verify that the flow valve opens.

After confirming the HPCS pump p^ inadvertent, stop the HPCS pump.

(1.0) injection was REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure Inadvertent HPCS Startup, PP. 1 and 2 ANSWER 4.11

(.50)

FALSE (0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Procedure 5.0, P. 2 ANSWER 4.12 (2.75)

RPV water level below +13.0 inches

-(0.5)

RPV pressure above 1037 psig (0.5)

Drywell pressure above 1.65 psig (0,5)

A condition which requires MSIV isolation (0.5)

A condition-which requires a reactor scram and reactor power is above 5% or cannot be determined.

(0.75)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Procedure 5.1.2, P. 1

', + >.

L PROCEDURES - NORMAL. ABNORMAL. EMERGENCY AE PAGE 38

. RADIOLOGICAL CONTROL

'-A?SWERS -- WNP-2

-86/08/11-HANEK, J.

1 ANSWER 4.13 (1.50)

Haat removal from the reactor sufficient to restore and maintain fuel cladding temperature belos 2200 degrees F.

(1.5)

REFERENCE l

Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals, P. 6 ANSWER 4.14 (1.50) 1 1.

Core submergence or (RPV level above TAF) 2.

. Spray cooling or (core spray operating at or above design conditions) j 3.

Steam cooling.

[3 0 0.5 each]

(1.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals, P. 6 W --

W 4.15 (2.50)

/

A

,G 9

a.

1.

E ff-LE 2.

5m utes (1.0; b.

Place the mode switch in shutdown and o at least one loop of in the suppression pool cooling mo (1.5 l

i t

NCE

^

~~~

NNP-2, T;;h. Specs. ?.S.2.1 oud 4.0.2.-1~

l ANSWER 4.16 (2.50) a.

1.

Manually scram the reactor.

2.

Place the mode switch to shutdown.

3.

Verify that APRM downscale lights are illuminated.

4.

Transfer recire pumps to the LFMG 5.

Close all MSIV's

[4 0 0.5 each)

(2.0) b.

Shift Manager (0.5)

REFERENCE WNP-2, Procedure 4.12.1.1, P.

11 i

^S D

y po

=

U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION SENIOR REACTOR OPERATOR LICENSE EXAMINATION Facility: WNP-2 Reactor Type: BWR-GES Date Administered: August 11, 1986 Examiner: THOMAS R. MEADOWS, RV Candidate:

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATE Use separate paper for the answers. Write answers on one side only. Staple question sheet on top of the answer sheets. Points for each question are indicated in parentheses after the question. The passing grade requires at least 70% in each category and a final grade of at least 80%. Examination papers will be picked up six (6) hours after the examination starts.

% of Category

% of Candidate's Category Value Total Score Value Category 25 25 5.

Theory of Nuclear Power Plant Operation, Fluids, and Thermodynamics, 25 25 6.

Plant Systems Design, Control and Instrumentation 25 25 7.

Procedures - Normal.

Abnormal, Emergency, and Radiological Control 25 25 8.

Administrative Procedures, Conditions, and Limitations 100 TOTALS Final Grade All work done on this examination is my can, I have neither given nor received aid.

r Candidate's Signature l

I i

REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMINISTRATION OF WRITTEN EXAMINATIONS 1.

A single room shall be provided for completing the written examina-tion. 'ihe location of this room and supporting restroom facilities shall be such as to prevent contact with all other facility and/or i

contractor personnel during the duration of the written examination.

If necessary, the facility should make arrangements for the use of a suitable room at a local school, motel, or other building.,Ob-taining this room is the responsibility of the licensee.

2.

Minimum spacing is required to ensure examination integrity as determined by the chief examiner.

Minimum spacing should be one candidate per table, with a 3-ft space between tables. No wall charts, models, and/or other training materials shall be present in the examination room.

3.

Suitable arrangements shall be made by the facility if the candi-dates are to have lunch, coffee, or other refreshments. These arrangements shall comply with Ites 1 above. These arrangements shall be reviewed by the examiner and/or proctor.

~

4.

The facility staff shall be provided a copy of the written examination and answer key after the last candidate has completed and handed in his written examination. The facility staff shall then have five working days to provide formal written comments with supporting documentation on the examination and answer key to the chief examiner or to the regional office section chief.

5.-

The licensee shall provide pads of 8-1/2 by 'll in. lined paper in unopened packages for each candidste's use in completing the exam-ination. The examiner shall distribute these pads to the candidates.

All reference material needed to complete the examination shall be furnished by the examiner. Candidates can bring pens, pencils, calculators, or slide rules into the examination room, and no other equipment or reference material shall be allowed.

6.

Cnly black ink or dark pencils should be used for writing answers to questions.

i P

Examiner Standards

lo n

4 NRC RULES AND GUIDELINES FOR LICENSE EXAMINATIONS During the administration of this examination the following rules apply:

1.

Cheating on the. examination means an automatic denial of your application' and could result in more severe penalties.

t l

2.

Restroom trips are to be limited and only one candidate at a time may leave. You must avoid all contacts with anyone outside the examination room to avoid even the appearance or possibility of cheating.

3.

Use black ink or dark pencil only to facilitate legible reproductions.

4.

Print your name in the blank provided on the cover sheet of the examination.

~

5.

Fill in the date on the cover sheet of the examination (if necessary).

6.

Use only the paper provided for answers.

7.

Print your name in the upper right-hand corner of the first page of each section of the answer sheet.

8.

Consecutively number each answer sheet, write "End of Category,,,ide of

" as appropriate, start each category on a new page, write only one s the paper, and write "Last Page" on the last answer sheet.

)

9.

Number each answer as to category and number, for example,1.4, 6.3.

10. Skip at least three lines between each answer.

)

4

11. Separate answer sheets from pad and place finished answer sheets face down on your desk or table.
12. Use abbreviations only if they are commonly used in facility literature.
13. The point value for each question is indicated in parentheses after the question and can be used as a guide for the depth of answer required.
14. Show all calculations, methods, or assumptions used to obtain an answer to mathematical problems whether indicated in the question or not.

15.

Partial credit may be given. Therefore, ANSWER ALL PARTS OF THE QUESTION AND D0 NOT LEAVE ANY ANSWER ~ BLANK.

16.

If parts of the examination are not clear as to intent, ask questions of the examiner only.

17. You must sign the statement on the cover sheet that indicates that the work is your own and you have not received or been given assittance in completing the examination. This must be done after the examination has been completed.

Examiner Standards l

l

18. When you complete your examination, you shall:

s.

Assemble your examination as follows:

(1) Exam questions on top.

(2) Exam aids - figures, tables, etc.

(3) Answer pages including figures which are a part of the answer.

b.

Turn in your copy of the examination and all pages used to answer the examination questions.

c.

Turn in all scrap paper and the balance of the paper that you did

, not use for answering the questions.

d.-

Leave the examination area, as defined by the examiner.

If after leaving, you are found in this area while the examination is still in progress, your license may be denied or revoked.

"o e

I l

Examiner Standards

O 1

1 EQUATION SHEET l

~ '"

      • E Cycle efficiency = Net Work (out)-

2 w = mg s = v,t +

l at Energy (in)

E = mC a = (vg - v )/t KE = mv vg=v + at A = AN A = A,e PE = agh w = 8/t A = in 2/tg = 0.693/tg W = VAP g(eff) = (t )(t )

i; s

't AE = 931Am

(

+

)

Q=$ CAT I. I e'EX P

o Q = UAAT

-UX I.Ie Pwr = W ' E

-x h

~

g I=I 10 5UR(t)

P=P 10 TVL = 1.3/u y.p.t/T HVL = 0.693/u i

O SUR = 26.06/T

~

T = 1.44 DT SCR = S/(1 - K,gg)

/A*fr )

o SUR = 26 CR g,p

= S/(1 - K,gg )

1(

eff " 2(I ~ Edf)b T = I(i*/p ) + [(f 'p)/A,g,p] ~ T = 1*/ (p - E M " I/Cl - Kefg) = CR /CR g 0 ( ~ 8)! eff' M = (1 - K,gg)0 (1 - K,gg)g / 8*I eff'I)! eff = AK,ff/Kaff SDM = (1 - Keff)/Keff [1*/TK,'gf -] + [I/(1 + A,gf )] 1* = 1 x 10 seconds p= ~ T P = I$V/(3 x 1010) gaff = 0.1 seconds A I = Na Idly =Id22 WATER PARAMETERS Id =Id g 2 1 gal. = 8.345 lbm R/hr = (0.5 CE)/d (meters) 1 gal. = 3.78 liters R/hr = 6 CE/d (feet) I ft3 = 7.48 gal. HISCELLANEOUS CONVERSIONS i Density = 62.4 lbm/ft 1 Curie = 3.7 x 10 dps ~ 10 3 Density = 1 gm/cm 1 kg = 2.21 1ha 3 Heat of varorizationi = 970 Etu/lbm I hp = 2.54 x 10 BTU /hr 0 Heat of fusica = 144 Btu /lbm 1 Hw = 3.41 x 10 Btu /hr 1 Atm = 14.7 Psi = 29.9 in, l's. 1 Btu = 778 ft-lbf 2 1 ft. H 0 = 0,4333 lbf/in 1 inch = 2.54 cm g F = 9/5 C + 32 C = 5/9 (*F - 32) t 3 _.-, - - ,-..,,-,.e s n e - --,- ,-m-----,,.n ,......n.-,,.,,,,,.,,---a, .-...,n--. y..

7 SECTION 5 Theory of Nuclear Power Plant Operations, Fluids and Thermodynamics 5.1 (1.0) As a subcritical reactor nears criticality, the length of time to reach equilibrium count rate after an insertion of given fixed amount of positive reactivity... (SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER) ta) decreases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core. (b) increases primarily because of the increased population of delayed neutrons in the core. (c) increases because of a larger number of neutron life cycles required to reach equilibrium. (d) decreases because the source neutrons are becoming less important in relation to total neutron population. (c) Ref: Reactor Theory-Student text 5-1

o a 5.2 (2.0) Why is the value of Keff INDEPENDENT of initial source range counts ? INDEPENDENT-Keff (the neutron life cycle) only considers fission neutrons in the self-sustaining reaction. Ref: Reactor Theory-Student text I 1 6 e

i 5.3 (2.0) Answer the following TRUE or FALSE: (a) During equilibrium power conditions,the production rate of indirect Xenon from Iodine is faster than the decay rate of Xenon to Cesium. (0.5) f (b) Slowing the rate of a power decrease, lowers the height of the resultant Xenon peak. (O.5) (c) The resultant Xenon peak due to a scram from 50% power is larger than one from 100% power. (0.5) (d) During an increase in power from equilibrium (0.5) Xenon conditions, Xenon concentration initially decreases. (a) TRUE (b) TRUE (c) FALSE (d) TRUE Ref: Reactor Tneory - Student Text 6 9 4 3-5

9 l s 1 5.4 (3.0) (a) Will the resonance escape probability INCREASE or DECREASE with increasing void fraction 7 (0.5) (b) What is the reason or basis for your answer above? (2.5) DECREASE-The reason for this effect is that an increased number of voids results.in less neutron moderation,which results in an increase in the average distance traveled (and time required) by a neutron while slowing down to thermal energy levels-- neutrons spend more time.in the resonance capture energy region, resulting in increased RESONANCE l ABSORPTION, hence a DECREASED resonance escape probability. 2 Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text i 4 i' 4 l I I e T 3-4

a 1 5.5 (1.0) What two physical phenomena ( specifically related to the neutron life cycle and fuel characteristics) along with increasing fael temperature, contribute to a negative doppler coefficient? NAME THESE TWO(2) PHENOMENA (0.5 points each) (e) Resonance broadening-neutron absorbtion at other than descrete energies (Doppler Effect) (b) Self-Shielding (heterogeneoun fuel pins) Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text 5-5

e 5.6 (4.0) Prior to performing a control rod notch calibration for the reactor engineer, the reactor is just critical at O.002% power. A control rod is subsequently withdrawn one notch and reactor power increases on a steady period with a DOUBLING TIME of 40 seconds. (a) What is the notch atrength (&K/K per notch) of the withdrawn control rod? (2.0) -(b) How long will it '.ake to reach O.08% power? (2.0) SHOW ALL WORK AND ASSUMPTION 3 (a) P=Po e (t /T).... P=2Po 2=e(DT/T) ,,DT=Deubling Time T In2 = DT.....T=4(/In2 T= 57.7 seconds 4 K/K=AK/Kred = U/1+3T any reasonable assumption: b O.OO70 4K/K %=0.isec-4K/K= 0. 0070/1+ (0.1) (57. 7) = 0.103 % 4K/K (b) 0.002% to 0.08% power change: P=Po e(t/T), 0.08% = 0.002% ett/T),,(Any T used from above acceptable) - solve for t t=212.8 seconds Ref: Reactor Theory - Student Text i 5-6

6 5.7 (2.0) How can the REVERSE POWER EFFECT occur in the core during control rod movements 7 J Reverse power effect is a decrease in overall core power upon the notch withdraw of a shallow control rod. An with deep rod control, local bundle power will increase as the i rod is withdrawn;however, in the lower regions of the core it is possible for the voiding effect created within-the i affected bundle by shallow rod withdraw to overrice the associated local power increase, subsequently lowering overall core power. 4 Ref: Reactor Theory-Student Text j .5 1 i s i I I i 1

1 I

l J 4 f 5-7

e 1 I 5.8 (4.0) The reactor is operating at 70% power. Recirculation flow is subsequently increased to provide stable 100% power and 100% flow conditions : (a) Why did the boiling boundry INITIALLY move further up the core? (1.0) (b) What causes the boiling boundry to return to near its original axial position and power to stabilize?(2.0) (c) Why did the new boiling boundry stabilize at a SLIGHTLY higher core position 7 ( 1. 0). (a) Initialy the water will travel further up the core before reaching saturation conditions because it spends less time in contact with the rods at a given point at higher flow rates. The boiling boundry subsequently moves further up the core. (b) As voids are initially displaced, resulting increased neutron moderation adds positive reactivity, and increases power. The power increase subsequently causes increased boiling - lowering the boiling boundry to near its original panition. The negative reactivity added by the return of voids and increased fuel temperatures offuets the positive reactivity added by increased flow-stabilizing power. (c) The boiling boundry stabilizes slightly higher providing positive reactivity (more moderation), to offuet the negative reactivity inserted by the doppler coefficient at higher fuel temperatures. Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, FNP2 Systems - Reactor Recirculation Flow Contal 5-8

,e i 5.9 (2.0) s What is the reason or basis for the MAPLHGR f THERMAL LIMIT ? To prevent fuel cladding disintegration (" gross cladding failure" ) during a DBA LOCA by limiting the peak clad temperature to < 2200 degrees F-- (limiting bundle stored energy such that any given fuel pin at any given axial / planer point will have a peak clad temperature below 2200 degrees F during a DBA LOCA dry-out condition. 2200 degrees assures that the cladding will not t I disintegrate-brittle fracture-upon the subsequent rewetting I by low pressure ECCS). Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, Technical Specifications I k 1 I i i ) a l i O T l 5-9

5.10 (1.0) What is the relationship between MAPRAT and MAPLHGR? MAPRAT = APLHGR/MAPLHGR Limit -or-APLHGR (actual)/ MAPLHGR (LCO ma:< ) Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid F1ow t 5-10

a e 5.11 (0.5) Of the following operations,which DNE will have a negative effect (reducing effect) on available Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) of a given centrifugal pump: (a) Throttling open the pump's suction valve. (b) Throttling open the pump's discharge valve. (c) Decreasing the pump's speed. (d) Decreasing the temperature of the fluid (water) being pumped. (b) Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow i l l 9 5-11

0 0 5.12 (0.5) Consider a real plant system (NON-IDEAL) with two centrifugal pumps in parallel, one of which is running at 1800 RPM. The second pump is started and run at 1000 RPM. l System flow will be... SELECT THE CORRECT ANSWER i i (a) more than double the original flow due to decreased flow resistance. (b) slightly less than double the original flow due to increased flow resistance. (c) the same since only the dicharge head changes. (d) reduced by one-half due to increased discharge head. (b) 4 Ref: General Electric-Thermodynamics Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow 4 l i l 4 1 i ] 1 G-12

d 5.13 (2.0) Identify the following on the attached Figure 5.6 (T-S diagram of a symplified steam cycle): (0.25 pts each) (a) Subcooled Region (b) Critical Point (c) Saturated Liquid Line (d) Saturated Vapor Line (e) Superheat Region (f) Ideal work out of HP turbine (g) Ideal work out of LP turbine (h) Feedwater heating process (see attached Figure 5.13 KEY) END OF SECTION 5.0 k 4 5-13

.=. i 1 1 i> 45 T . M. ) l l 'O .to EXTRACTION STEM i l N 5\\ 1, 8-i /~f - V 7' 1 CONDENSER 49 5 l 5 l r 4 c Figure

5. B^
  • se W

.S.. l 1 l 1 I e J a I e

  • WD e e

l i i s. i I F'LUID REGION MINT i n j y MMTED VAPOR T SbBC00 LED REGION T i 5G 91n l W HP TURBINC ' out '6 ~ b bMb_ '_ _ _ ~ 4 SN" "out LP TURDInc 1 FEEDWATER HEATING u 7 \\ V 7. CONDENSER SATURATED LIQUID LINE l s Figure ---KEY 5.1-3^-- e g. I s f 4 e o e e em e e -.---,e,------g.,g w-----m------+ ,y.,- --,n e.--- -e.--.. --,_-_,--,.w.,,-,w-r- ,m.ne,-


.---n---e-,,-e v,

e.,, - - -, ---- --e

4 SECTION 6.0 t Plant Systems Design, Control, and Instrumentation 6.1 (1.5) I List three(3) of the four(4) major ESF 4160 Vac component loads supplied by critical switchgear bus SM-B division 2. (0.5 points each) Any three of the following: RHR Pump B RHR Pump C SSW Pump 1D (B) CRD Pump 1B (B) Ref: WNP2 Systems-A.C. Distribution i + +. 1 't 6-1

E 6.2 (0.5) FILL IN THE BLANK Each D.C. division battery system has sufficient capacity to + supply the DC power requirements of the redundant (Division ~ 1 and 2) load groups f or at least hour (s) following loss of power to the battery chargers (station black-out) coincident with a design bases accident. N two (2) Ref: WNP2 Systems-D.C. Power System l 0 5-2 ~

6.3 (3.0) What is the reason or basis f or the 105 secored initiation logic time delay in each of the two ADS logic channels (A/C and B/D respectively)? (include in your dicussion the reason that this time delay is not set for a longer period) This time delay is intended to allow HPCS sufficient time to reflood the vessel in the event of a small to intermediate break, but not so long that the RHR(LPCI) and LPCS systems would be unable to cool the fuel, coincident with a HPCS failure to start when ADS is relied upon to provide depressurization. Ref: WNP2 Systems-ADS 1 1 - ~

6.4 (3.0) A level two(2) RPV level trip at -50" will initiate NSSSS Isolation, Groups 1,2,3,4,L7. What are the other three(3) trip functions associated with this level trip 7 ( 1.0 pt. each) 1 (a) Initiate RCIC i (b) Initiate HPCS (including the HPCS D/G) j (c) Trip the Recirculation pumps Ref: WNP2 Systems-Nuclear Boiler Instrunentat on 9 6-4

s 6.5 (2.5) A 10 minute time delay after a LFCI initiation sional def eat = 41-1. o close signals to/CPCI injection - val ves HR-V-53A and V What are two(2) reasons that this ECCS flow path is _ preferred? ( 1.25 pts each ) 0] [f0' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' " ,,,,.y-(a) To prevent cold water transients that would occur if direct core injection were used. (b) To prevent baron dilution accidents, if baron had been injected in an emergency conditions, f) Ref: WNP2 Systerrs-RHR eag 9 ~~ ?~~ 9,.,2-m. z (n) ms n a,- ~ w - - ? c e 7.r s,s e c r i >- /~r,or ru e A'P V s.~er w - fg) gt ~g'seWff 7Nsf /"t p *.- s e !"M s ".7N ES /,Wd*C ff Y / "5"/#d ' "r r~xo~s r a, - < o n,, ,,,,.cies er / Al*C /^* C - g p pg* gyg j g 1 a 6-5 7

6.6 (0.5) At what RPV pressure (decreasing).will the LPCI injection valves receive an open permissive signal after LPCI logic i initiation 7 1 i 470 psig Ref: WrJP2 Systems-RHR ~ e I 1 l i i ~'R l i 4 i I. i e e i. 1 i i j i b~h i

o 6.7 (1.5) What three conditions will result in an IRM inoperative rod block ? (0.5 points each) Detectcr High Volts Low Module Unplugged IRM Mode (Function) Switch not in operate Ref: WNP2 Systems-IRM 6-7

s 6.9 (1.5) The gamma flux error signal IS discriminated against in the intermeadiate power range. How is this accomolished by the IRM system 7 t Gamma discrimination is still necessary in the intermediate power range,but is not accomplished by means of an active discrimination circuit. Gamma discrimination in the IRM system is a natural censequence of the mean-square-analog (Campbell) method of measurement,such that the gamma contribution to the output signal becomes insignificant. (a dctailed discussion of circuit operation or "Campbelling" is not required) Ref: WNP2 Systems-IRM 1 f r 6-8

= 6.9 (3.0) For each of the f ollowing scram signals, state the' reactor mode switch position (include necessary opernting conditions and/or component positions) that WILL bypass the scram signal: (0.5 points each) (a) IRM INOP (b) IRM Hi-Hi (c) APRM Hi-Hi (15%) (d) APRM Hi-Hi (118%) (e) SCRAM Discharge Volume (f) MSIV Closure (a) Run mode i (b) Run made (c) Run modo (d) not in Run Mode (e) In S/D or Refuel, and SDV keylock switch in bypass (f) not in Run Mode, and < 1056 psig Ref: WNP2 Systems-RPS l i 6-9

6.10 (2.5) What is a Non-Coincidence Scram? (Include what scram trips can be set up for non-coincidence, how set up is accomplished, and when non-coincidence is used) With shorting links removed, any one SRM,IFM, or APRM (Nuclear Instrumentation) scram signal from any RPS channel will result in a full scram. This non-coincident nuclear instrumentation scram capability is used during initial core loadingjd5duringsometestingj#63hutdownmargin demonstrationsf"lollowing any refueling cycle. Ref: WNP2 Systems - RPS / e l 6-10

6.11 (4.0) Concerning the attached Figure 6.11 ( two pump power / core ficw operating map): (a) Identify the Natural Circulation Line (0.25) (b) What is the reason or basis for the Natural Circulation Line 7 (0.75) (c) Identify the Twenty Four(24%) Percent PumpSpeedL1}ne._ (0.25) (d) What is the reason or basis for the Twenty Four(24%) Percent Pump Speed Line? (0.75) (a) Identify the Constant Speed Lines. (0.25) (f) What is the reason or basis fer the Constant Speed Lines? (0.75) (g) Identify the Recirculation Pump Cavitation Line. (0.25) (h) What i= the resscn or basis f or the Recirculation Pump Cavitation line ? (0.75) (see Figure 6.11-KEY, for questions a,c,e,& g) (b) As power is increased by withdrawing control rods, care i flow will increase due to natural circulation effects - hatter water and steam within the core shroud i s less dense than the subcooled water of the downcomer area. This_effect will support a natural core flow that supplements forced circulation-occuring with or withcut forced circulation. Its effect is more pronounced at lower core flows due to less flow resistance at lower power levels. (d) The 24% pump speed lines define core flow at varying power levels for MINIMUM pump speed. (f) Defines the change in core flow,with constant pump 6 N ^'" "* speed, due to rod pattern changes. Flow increases as Power is decreased (by inserting control rods) due to decreased channel flow resistance as steam production . decreases. (h) Defines the locus of power / flow conditions, below which cavitation of the recirculation pumps would occur. Ref: WNP2 Systems - RFC 6-11

[' i ; ',-

l Figure 6.11 120 WNP 3 iWO PUMP OPERAilON l 110 gC A 100 8 ~ 7 { 80 6 l Eg 70 5 2 4 g 60 2 U O l E 50 'g# / A. / / 40 y s 30 -~ .' ~'N l 20 K 10 [ I I I I I I - 0 0 10 20 30 R 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 PERCENT CORE FLOW TWO-PUMP TilERMAL POWER - CORE FLOW OPERATING MAP BASED ON: . ass ess ig ~ N W 190 FSAR, APPENDIX 11, FIGURE 11.2.5-1 =

(' 's ~ Figure 6.11 KEY 120 WHP-3 TWO Pune OPEnATION N -JET PuuP HO22 E CAVai AllON LINE 110 s.xt euur sucisON eavsiAliON t Nc Lines 0-9 & A-C are BC ^ n.nccinc ruue caviiAliON tis 4E " Constant speed lines" v -VALVE cAViiAisON LW4E 9 100 renctNi vALvt rossiiON FLOW COHinOL VALVE 8 e a nAlunAL cincuLAllON g e 24% roue sesto 7 soo 3 8 100% PUMP SPEED g a se 6 e as 5 3: 70 4, y 60 3p 0)/ / o 6 60 / N L / 40 p s 30 R ,f ~%g V N 20 Ny H N 10 S R I I I I I I O O 10 20 30 R 40 50 60 70 80 00 100 110 PERCENT CORE FLOW TWO-PUMP THERMAL POWER - CORE FLOW OPERATING MAP I ~ DASED OH: assess.th FSAR, APPENDIX 11, 'I!OV'88b FIGURE 11.2.51

6.12 (0.5) Following a reactor scram, the four rod display position goes blank, and the green full-in light on the full core display for the selected control rod is lighted. ] Is this normal indication for the RMCS (YES or NO) ? YES Ref: WNP2 Systeras - RMCS i e i 6-12

4 6.13 (1.0) The shutdown cooling made of the RHR system is isolated at 125 psig. What is the reason or basis for this isolation? To protect the RHR pumps from exceeding their design Saturation Temperature (360 degrees F.) for 135 psig. Ref: WNP2 Systems - Nuclear Boiler Instruinentation j END OF SECTION 6.0

  • * * *
  • m *
  • m
  • m m *
  • m mm m mm mm
  • m
  • m *-* m 4

1 0 6-13

SECTION 7.0 Procedures - Normal, Abnormal, Emergency, and Radiological Control 7.1 (2.0) What is the reason or bases for NOT starting more than two(2) circ water pumps while SM1,2,& 3 are being supplied by startup transformer TR-S,upon Plant Startup? An undervoltage or degraded voltage on TR-S will occur upon the start of the third circ water pump. Ref: PPM 3.1.2, Plant Startup 4 r 4 7-1

7.2 (2.0) State four(4) of the five(5) items logged at the time of criticality, required by PPM 3.1.2 - Plant Startup. (0.5 pts each) i (Any 4 of the following) (a) Time - (b) Control Rod Position (c) Neutron level (d) Reactor period (e) Reactor coolant temperature I Ref: PFi-i 3.1. 2 Pl en t Star tup i J r f l I i 7-2

7.3 (3.0) Concerning the MINIMUM REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEMPERATURE VERSUS REACTOR VESSEL PRESSURE curves (attached figures 7.3.a and 7.3.b). The RCS temperature and pressure shall be limited in accordance with the limit curves A and A*, B and B*, C and C' for different plant conditions associated with these curves. What are the plant conditions and/or evolutions applicable to each of the three (3) limit curve sets A and A*, B and B', C and C',respectively ? (Temperature limits are NOT necessary) ( 1.0 pt. for each ) ( can be in any order ) (a) A-A'; Hydrostatic or leak testing (b) B-B'; for heatup by Non-nuclear means,Cooldoen following a nuclear shutdown, and low power physi-: tests (c) C-C'; for nonrations with a critical core ( otner than low power physics tests) Ref: Technical Specifications 7-3

Figure 7.3.a A '5 C I If ~h l I l l Il.I y ^ i l ll fl I 1. l l Il l ~ I I 1 Q I; l l l l 1 II I l 6I I I I Il I Q i l l' I l }l l I M ecam I I l / i ~l i Il l 17iilI ~ l I li ll I III I I I I -1 11 I I I I I I I I J l l I ~ l L II / I II I i I ' / I II IIl I j,,, I I /I I II I lAl I I l l l ~ i i i I/ I II AII I I i ll If I l l L l l R6"l I l l l 1 I l l l Il l il I hl I l l l l l l i, I I I I I ll LVI I I I I I I 1 s i l l '/i il 81l l l l l 1i ll l ll I/, F l I' l I I l l l 7~ ~ 2 III Ill RIIl l I III I I I IL icP l I I I I i i l i i ~ l l l' / IbdiII I I Il l l / MI I llI i l l l l l l / / I II l l l l l l l l-II l / '/l i II l l l l l l l l ~ l l l Ill l II l l l l 1 1II l VL ll l l l l l 1 III I1 6 Ii l l l l l l l l 1 I I I .I I I I I I III I I-1I i ] o too nos aos e a umamuu asacron vcssa, me7As. Tsursmarune (+r)

  • -l h

MINIMUM REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEMPERATURE VERSUS .REACTCR VESSEL PRESSURE (INITIAL VALUES) WASHINGTON NUCLEAR - UNIT 2 3/4 4-20

Figure 7.3 .b A' n* c' l IIf I l l l I: l l l / I I I I I S i fI I I l-l I l/ I I I l' I I I I l~ l Il- ~ l l ', iJedohJ l ? l I MtV il l I ~~ 1 I / ll F I ai s,,- s % I i l 1 .I I I f /l Il i I in # a'ah*a l I / / 'I I I I""i""i"i"'I i l I / lli I 'l l II II; I I I / f!/ I I! ~ j,,, I I m/ ) ll i I I I I I i I I W / Il l l l l l l I I TPAJ 'l I i I i .l I I I / IMD, / I I i l I i 3, I I /l I /f//l l I i l I i 5. IIIf / ffd l I Iii lI! III '/ / ,I I I i I i I III I/ / 1%I l l III I I i 1/ / I r'A l i I I I I I I / /l Il l l l l l I i / / II Iii ll l / / I I i i lIi iI / I/I I i l l l l l I I I i 1 I 'fl c!2I'" l I i i I I I l l / 17 l l l l i I i I I I I I I I i o., too. 200 soo ao soo -i umiuuu nEAcTen vEssa utTM. TE.WERATUnt (*F) !iitlIttN REACTOR VESSEL METAL TEM.PERATURE VERSUS , REACTOR V253EL FRE55URE (OFERATIONAL VALUES) 'JASHIttGTON NUCLEAR - UNIT 2 3/4 4-21

7.4 (2.0) If any of the RCS Pressure / Temperature limits are exceeded (limit curves shown on figures 7.3.a&b), What ACTION is required per Technical Specifications ? Restore the temperature and/or pressure to within the limits within 30 minutes; perform an engineering evaluation to determine the effects of the out-of-limit condition on structural integrity of the RCS; determine that the RCS remains acceptable for continued operations-Ref: Technical Specifications ~ i i i 7-4

j 7.5 (3.0) In accordance with 10 CFR 20, " Standards for Protection against Radiation": (a) What are the Radiation Dose Standards for individuals in restricted areas per calender quarter? (1.5) (b) What are the three requirements that must be met if the Whole Body limits for a calender quarter are to be exceeded? (1.5) (a) (0.5 ots. each) 1.25 Rem - Whole Body (head & trunk, active blood forming organs, lens of eyes, gonads) 18.75 Rem - Hands & Forearms; Feet & Ankles 7.5 Rem - Skin of Whole Body (b) (0.5 pts, each) 3.0 Rem per calender quarter - MAXIMUM 5*(N-18) total accumulated done to the whole body, Where N is the individual age in years at his last birthday. Form NRC -4 or equivalent. Ref: 10 CFR 20 J 7-5

7.6 (3.0) A LOCA has occured and a high temperature steam enviornment exists in the drywell. EXPLAIN why the drywell sprays must NOT be initiated if containment conditions exist such that the UNSAFE region of attached figure 7.6 (DRYWELL SPRAY INITIAlION PRESSURE LIMIT) is entered. Spray initiation above this limit may (through the combined effects of evaporative and convective cooling) result in a containment _degressurization rate which exceeds the relief N gra# % city of the7. F. Lu D.W. vacuum breakers. As a result, containment negative design pressure may be exceeded, i leading to containment failure. Ref: EPG's, General Electric-Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals e i l 7-6

eu rigure 7.6 DRYWELL SPRAY INITIATION PRESSURE LIMIT 250 ZOki% NWRD? <&,:t :: #p .8%:df? :it4 g a+;,m.m. / U".yth:; ^# 240 w,k,;g,y$?.Nsi 9.3,g#klCh. -, Nk;e,,.c.m[f.: ! Y, k;;;,.. :. ..,h.;9.i.d2i..i*f[y:' ,,y,. v.....-... bI SNS -.. I'(g-k.W:gisy;,.-(^i.w.5M.,p;j[. Y b5 ~* 4.

q r h Yk

'i'.$>$N. M

a

.-( g ' A 'X e. h [. ' $4:7. < S'i'3.d'b'^2_SiISM<* $$?Iih,,,@T[N 3 f. 44'O " Y tj ~

-Ds y.
.,v p-.s -

c.ir ya-wX .+:.e;k #.::s;i!m s W'Ni: Nh+'2e>? v'(:386: - !4.'YR $UY .w. 9Yi'-3;e k. . e r f < 200 TE$.48' ETJS .:s:< :.gl.M.isy.m$6 M.e;ee-960 P E 1 g w: 2

      1. w, <+;.p;;3# MM

) ,w! wws:s g no e g w%g 17$ @ 6 7 +5... .fim:< m:., o.: w g W!Nid((lII:(43%< [s-'l 'w2-:1 9pv.f g 'wwc I 's%1' N.~if. hyw + x O "W lf$'bN'h: $;<N<Mk. j. Mw -v i. $$/ .m

S..e:

.w. 4 '. 120 xT.'. 100 I O 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 SUPPRESSION CHAMBER PRESSURE (PSIG) 1 O l

3 7.7 (2.0) Define ADEQUATE CORE COOLING, as used in the Emergency Procedures. Heat removal from the reactor sufficient to restore and maintain peak fuel cladding temperature below 2200 degrees F. -oK-Ref: EPG's, General Electric-Emergency Operating Procedure Fundamentals s, x - - ~ - - c, C o d t s.s. g g y,* [ h d V ) -j -s (J/ ~ '/ Jf. M cd [dd)& y_ @ -M., _ c.j = [,, y a - = - -- y i e 7-7

7.8 (4.0) State four(4) of the five(5) " entry conditions" for RPV Level Control (RPV/L),per the Emergency Procedures. (include all associated setpoints) (1.0 pts. each) (any four of the following) (a) RPV Water Level below + 13.0 in. (b) RPV pressure above 1037 psig (c) Drywell pressure above 1.65 psig (d) A condition which requires MSIV isolation (c) A condition which requires a scram and power is above.57. or cannot be determined. Ref: Emergency Procedures 1 I + 7-8

7.9 (4.0) State four(4) of the five(5) systems / components listed in PPM 5.4.1, Station Blackout, which when lost constitute initiation of the Station Blackout Emergency Procedure. ( One pt. each ) .(any four of the fc11owing five) (a) Offsite 230 KV startup power (b) Offsite 115 KV backup power (c) Diesel Generator # 1 (d) Diesel Generator #2 (e) HPCS Diesel Generator i Ref: Emergency Procedures, PPM G.4.1 END OF SECTION 7.0 7-9

SECTION 8.0 Adminestrative Procedures, Conditions and Limitations 8.1 (3.0) What is the reason or basis that Technical Specifications requires you restore Suppression Pool (SP) water temperature to below 90 degrees F within twenty-four hours, under power operating conditions? j Blowdown from an initial SP water temperature of 90 degrees F results in a water temperature of about 135 degrees F. This is below analyzed temperatures required for con.plete condensation, and ensures adequa,te,ayai_1qble,NPSij {ce_both the RHR and Core Spray pumps [}Therefore, operator action to /L'# maintain SP temperature within the specified limits ensures cec # " 4 that containment integrity will be maintained fcr all g ' "~ analyzed accidents. fy sn rany Ref: Technical Specifications 1 1 ~ k G-1

8.2 (2.0) State two times when the Control Room Operator has the authority and responsibility to initiate a reactor plant shutdown. ( 1.0 pt. each ) (a) When the CRO determinen that the safety of the Reactor is in jeopardy. (b) When operating parameters exceed any of the reactor protection circuit setpoints AND an automatic shutdown does not occur. Ref: PPM-1.3.1, Standing Operating Orders i i I l ~ r l s 8-2 . ~

t 8.3 (2.0) t Concerning the FUEL CLADDING INTEGRITY safety limits: a Overheating of the fuel cladding ts prevented by... ESELECT THE TWO(2) CORRECT STATEMENTS, listed below-1.0 pt.each] (a) restricting fuel power operation such that the reactor coolant never reaches saturated conditions. (b) restricting fuel power operation to within the nucleate boiling regime. (c) establishing a safety limit such that MCPR is not LESS THAN 1.06 for two(2) recirc. loop operation. (d) establishing a safety limit such that MCPR is not MORE THAN 1.06 for two(2) recirc. loop operation. (b) (c) Ref: Technical Specifications 9 i 8-3 s a

e 8.4 (3.5) What are the minimun requirements for rotating shift crew size in operational modes 1,2, or 3, per Technical Specifications (include the position, number. of personnel for each position, type of license required) ? (0.5 pts, each) (a) Shift Manager (SRO License on WNP2) - 1 (b) Control Room Supervisor (SRO License on WNP2) -1 (c) Reactor Operator ( Operator License on WNP2) -2 (d) Equipment Operator - 2 (e) Shift Technical Advisor - 1 (f) Health Physics Technician - 1 (g) Fire brigade members - 5 (not to include the Shift Supervisor, STA, nor three other members of the minimum shift crew necessary for safe plant shutdown and any personnel required for other essential functions during a fire emergency) Ref: Technical Specifications, PPM 1.3.2 - Shift Compliment and Functions 8-4

o B.5 (1.5) How are the following controlled keys maintained when not required for normal operation ? (Indicate the storage location and WHO controls these key sets) (0.5 pts. each) (a) Bypass and Interlock keys (b) Control Room Panel Door keys (c) Miscellaneous keys lockable cabinet) controlled by (a) Control Room (Separate SM/CRSk (Separatelockablecabinet)controlledby (b) Control Room SM/CRSF (c) Radwaste Control Room (Separate lockable cabinet controlled by the Shift Support Superviserk/- PPM 1.3.23 - Adminestrative control of plant operating keys O 8-5

8.6 (3.0) Concerning the control of overtime, per PPM-1.3.27 " OVERTIME CONTROL": (1.0 pt. each) (a) What is the longest period of consecutive hours that an individual may be scheduled to work (excluding shift turnover time)? .(b) What is the maximum number of hours that an individual may work in a 48 hour period (excluding shift turnover time)? (c) What is the minimum break time required between work periods, including shift turnover time? (a) 16 hours (b) 24 hours (c) 8 hours Ref: PPM.1.3.27 - Overtime Control ) l 8-6

= I 8.7 (3.0) Per 10 CFR 55, " Operator Licenses" (1.0 each) (a) The " Exemptions from Licenses" provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations (10 CFR 55), allow what individuals to operate the reactor controls without a license? (b) As defined in 10 CFR 55, when is an individual deemed to be operating the controls of a nuclear facility? (c) What are the " controls" defined in 10 CFR 55? (a) An individual may manipulate the controls as part of his training to qualify for an operator license under the direction and in the presence of a licensed operator or senior operator. (b) An individual is deemed to operate the controls of a nuclear facility if he directly manipulates the controls or directs anouther to manipulate the controls. (c) " controls"- apparatus and mechanisms, the manipulation of which directly affect the reactivity or power level of the reactor. Ref: 10 CFR 55 9-7

o s 9 8.8 (2.0) Per 10 CFR 20, " Standards for Protection Against Radiation": (1.0 pt. each) (a) What is a RADIATION AREA ? (b) What is a HIGH RADIATION AREA ? (a) Area (accessible to personnel) where a major part of the body could receive: 5 mrem in one hour (0.5) -or-100 mrem in 5 days (0.5) (b) Area (accessible to personnel) where a major part of the body could receive 100 mrem in i hour (1.0) Ref: 10 CFR 20 i 4 l 8-8

O o 8.9 (3. 0)- Temporary changes to procedures as described by Technical Specification 6.8.3, may be made provided what three(3) criteria are met ? (1.0 each) (a) The intent of the original procedure is not altered. (b) The change is approved by two members of th'e unit management staff, at least one of whom holds a Senior Operator license on the unit affected. 4 (c) The change is documented, reviewed.by the POC, and approved by the Plant Manager within 14 days of implementation. Ref: Technical Specifications O-9 l

O s *' ; e 8.10 (2.0) What is the basis or reason for maintaining a minimum water level of at least 22 feet over the top of the spent fuel storage pool racks and reactor pressure vessel flange, per Technical Specifications? To ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove .99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irradiated fuel assembly. Ref: Technical Specifications END OF SECTION 8.0 END OF EXAM

  • ++*********************************************************

\\ o G-10}}